HP B132L+ Owner's Manual
Model B132L/B132L /B160L/B180L Owner â s Guide HP Part No. A4190-90023 Edition E0997 Printed in U.S.A.
 Hewlett-Packard Co. 1997 Printing History First Printing: Septermber 1997 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETT -P ACKARD MAKES NO W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MA TERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FIT- NESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be lia- ble for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copy- right. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written con- sent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by gov- ernment is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents iii Preface 1 Audience 2 Safety and Regulatory Statements 2 Release Document(s) 2 Related Manuals 3 Revision History 3 Documentation Conventions 4 Problems, Questions, and Suggestions 5 1 System Overview Product Description 9 System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs 1 1 System Power Switch 12 Power LED 12 System LEDs 12 Audio Controls 13 Removable Storage Devices 13 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 14 Security Loop 15 Audio Connectors 15 Keyboard Connectors 17 PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 17 HP Parallel I/O Connector 17 802.3 Network Connectors 17 Serial I/O Connectors 18 SCSI Connectors 18 TOC Button 19
iv Contents Power Cord Connector 19 Monitors 20 Keyboard 20 Pointing Devices 20 Operating System Overview 21 Important Information Y ou Need to Record 22 LANIC ID 22 IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information 23 Networking Overview 24 Mail 24 telnet 24 rlogin 24 ftp 25 rcp 25 NFS 25 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 29 CD-ROM Drive 29 Controls and Features 30 CD-ROM Media 32 Caring for CD-ROM Discs 32 Operating the CD-ROM Drive 33 Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc T ray 33 Disc T ray Description 33 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 34 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 35 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 36 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 38
Contents v V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 39 Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 40 Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 40 Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 42 Reading the Busy Light 43 T roubleshooting 45 3 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 49 DDS Drive 49 Storage Capacities 49 Controls and Indicators 50 LEDs 51 LED W arning Conditions 52 Data Cassettes 53 Media Life 53 Cleaning the T ape Heads 54 Media Restrictions 54 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 55 Operating the DDS T ape Drive 56 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 56 V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 57 Using Device Files 58 Archiving Data 59 W riting to a Data Cassette 59 Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 60 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 60 Further Command Information 61 T roubleshooting 62 Ordering Information 62
vi Contents 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 65 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 65 Inserting and Removing a Diskette 66 Operating the Floppy Drive 67 V erifying the Floppy Drive Conï¬guration 67 Using Device Files 68 Formatting a New Diskette 69 T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 70 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 70 Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 70 Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 71 For More Information 72 Conï¬guring the Floppy Driver 73 T roubleshooting 74 Ordering Information 74 5 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 77 Problems with Powering Up the System 77 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 78 Problems with the 802.3 Network 79 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 80 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 81 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 82 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 83 LED Error Codes 84 Dealing with a Boot Failure 87 Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 88
Contents vii Device V eriï¬cation 90 A Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 93 Declaration of Conformity 2 94 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 95 For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: 95 Emissions Regulations 96 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 96 VCCI Class 2 ITE 97 97 Emissions Regulations Compliance 98 Acoustics 99 Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV 99 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions 100 Safety Statement 101 Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) 102 V isible LEDs 102 W arnings and Cautions 103 B Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardwar e Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 107 Preparing Y our W orkstation 109
viii Contents Removing the Main T ray Assembly 1 1 1 Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 1 12 Installing Storage Devices 1 14 Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device 115 Conï¬guring your Storage Device 1 15 Determining Y our Storage Devices Position 115 Removing the Storage T ray 1 17 Removing the Storage T ray Cover 120 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format T ape Drive 121 Installing a Floppy Drive 123 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 126 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 131 Replacing the Storage T ray Cover 132 Replacing the Storage T ray 133 Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive 135 Installing Additional memory 137 Removing Memory Modules 138 Installing Memory Modules 141 Removing Cache Boards 144 Installing Second Level Cache Boards 146 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 148 Graphics Adapter Considerations 149 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 149 Graphics Paths 150 Graphics Conï¬guration Restrictions 150 Installing the Option Board 151 Replacing the Battery 155 Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module 161 Installing the Optional Fast W ide Differential SCSI Controller 163
Contents ix Changing Y our Monitor T ype 168 Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface 168 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 168 Changing the Console to External T erminal 169 C SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences 173 SCSI Restrictions 175 Cables 175 Connectors and T erminators 177 SCSI Conï¬guration Constraints 177 Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 177 Fast W ide Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 178 Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 179 Determining SCSI Bus Length 180 NSE SCSI Bus Length 180 FWD SCSI Bus Length 181 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Bus Length 182 Assigning SCSI Device IDs 184 NSE SCSI Device IDs 185 FWD SCSI IDs 187 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI IDs 188 Connecting to the SCSI Ports 190 SCSI Port Connection 190 D The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features 195 Accessing the Boot Console Interface 200
x Contents Booting Y our W orkstation 201 Searching for Bootable Media 203 Resetting Y our W orkstation 204 Displaying and Setting Paths 205 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype 208 The Monitor Command 208 Displaying the Current Monitor Conï¬guration 209 Setting the Monitor T ype 210 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 212 Changing the Console to External T erminal 213 Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration 214 Memory Information Sample 1 215 Displaying the Status of the System I/O 216 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags 217 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode 219 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode 220 Displaying the LAN Station Address 221 Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) 222 Displaying System Information 224 Displaying PIM Information 225
Contents xi Figures System Unit Front Panel Controls 11 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 14 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features 30 CD-ROM Disc Tray 33 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 34 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 35 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 36 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 37 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 38 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes 51 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes 52 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape 55 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 56 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette 65 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 66 System Unit Front Panel LEDs 84 Removing the Floor Stand 110 Removing Main Tray Assembly 111 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 112 Disk Tray Positions (Side View) 116 Removing the Memory Retainer 117 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly 118 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly 119 Removing the Storage Tray Cover 120 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 121 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 122
xii Contents Removing the Floppy Filler Panel 123 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive 124 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 125 Disconnecting the Floppy Drive Cable 126 Removing the Floppy Disk Drive Assembly 127 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 128 Replacing the Floppy Drive and Carrier 129 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 130 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 131 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 132 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 133 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 134 Memory Module Location 138 Removing the Memory Retainer 139 Removing a Memory Module 140 Memory Module Location 141 Removing the Memory Retainer 142 Installing Memory Modules 143 Cache Boards Location 144 Removing a Cache Board 145 Cache Boards Location 146 Installing Cache Boards 147 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit 148 Removing the Option Board Support Bracket and Blank Plate 151 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 152 Removing the PCI Adapter 153 Replacing the Option Board Support Bracket 154 Removing the Memory Retainer 155 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly 156 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly 157
Contents xiii Removing the Battery 158 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 159 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 160 Installing the Optional EGRAM Module 161 Installing the Optional FWD SCSI Controller 163 Removing the Storage Tray Cover 164 Removing the Blank Plate 165 Installing the FWD SCSI Cable 166 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 167 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators 190
xiv Contents T ables Audio Electrical Specifications 16 Serial I/O Pins 18 Sample LANSCAN COMMAND TABLE 23 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Features 31 DDS Tape Drive Capacities Without Data Compression 49 DDS Tape Drive Capacities With Data Compression 49 Power Up Problems 77 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 78 Problems with the 802.3 Network 79 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 80 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 81 Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive 82 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 83 LED Error Codes 85 Default SCSI IDs 115 Storage Configurations 116 SCSI Bus Differences 173 SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities 174 Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 178 Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 178 Ultra Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 179 Bus Length Worksheet for NSE SCSI Bus 181 Bus Length Worksheet for FW SCSI Bus 182 Bus Length Worksheet for UW SCSI Bus 183 Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs 186 Fast, Wide SCSI Device Drives and Device ID 188 Ultra Wide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID 189 System Paths 205 Mnemonic Style Notation 206
1 Preface
2 This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 B132L/B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the HP 9000 Model B132L/B160L/B180L Hardware Installation Card . Audience This guide is intended for HP 9000 B132L/B132L /B160L/B180L worksta- tion users. Safety and Regulatory Statements See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory state- ments that apply to this workstation. Release Document(s) Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your system or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication.
3 Related Manuals If you are using HP-UX version 10.20, refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠HP 9000 Model B132L/B160L/B180L Hardware Installation Card (A4190- 90010) ⢠Using Your HP Workstation (A2615-90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355-90050) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355-90053) ⢠HP Visual User Environment Userâs Guide (B1171-90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355-90038) ⢠HPUX X User Environment Userâs Guide ⢠Precision Architecture RISC HP 9000 Series 700 Diagnostics Manual (92453- 90010) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales ofï¬ce. Revision History The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4190-90023 E0997 First printing.
4 Documentation Conventions Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following symbolic conventions. user-supplied values Italic words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user input In examples, information that the user enters appears in color . output Information that the system dis- plays appears in this type- face . literal values Bold words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent commands or keywords that you must use literally . Path- names are also in bold. KEY T ext with a line above and a line below denotes a key on your key- board, or a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display . (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.)
5 Pr oblems, Questions, and Suggestions If you have any problems, questions, or suggestions with our hardware, soft- ware, or documentation, please call 1-888-301-5932 (US & Canada) or con- tact the HP Response Center for your country .
6
7 1 System Overview
8 System Overview This chapter introduces the HP 9000 B132L/B132L /B160L/B180L work- stations. Its purpose is to familiarize you with your workstation and its con- trols and indicators. The information is presented in the following sections: ⢠Product Description ⢠System unit front panel controls and LEDs ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboard ⢠Pointing devices ⢠Operating system overview ⢠Important information you need to note ⢠Networking overview
9 System Overview Product Description Product Description The B Class workstations have the following key features: ⢠Processor Performance Model B132L - 132 Mhz (33 Mhz GSC) Model B132L - 132 Mhz (33 Mhz GSC) Model B160L - 160 Mhz (40 Mhz GSC) Model B180L - 180 Mhz (36 Mhz GSC) ⢠Operating System Model B132L/B160L - Native HP-UX (version 10.20 or greater) Model B132L /B180L - Native HP-UX (version 10.20 or greater ACE) ⢠User Interface HP VUE graphical user interface HP CDE graphical user interface ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Optional Graphics: Model B132L/B160L - HP VISUALIZE-24Z, 24-plane graphics HP VISUALIZE-8/24, Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane 3D graphics Model B132L /B180L - HP VISUALIZE-8/24/48/48XP HP VISUALIZE-EG/DualEG ⢠Main Memory Model B132L/B160L - 6 slots of main memory allowing 32 to 768 MBytes Model B132L /B180L - 6 slots of main memory allowing 32 to 768 MBytes ⢠Second Level Cache 2 slots allowing 1 MB of second level cache ⢠Internal Storage Devices 3.5-inch Slimline Floppy Disk Drive (not a SCSI Device) Single-Ended SCSI Hard Disks (up to two) Single-Ended SCSI CD-ROM Drive Single-Ended SCSI 2.0/4.0/8.0 GB, 4-mm DDS-Format Tape Drive Fast, Wide SCSI Hard Disk Drives (requires optional FW SCSI adapter)
10 System Overview Product Description Model B132L /B180L only - Ultra-SCSI 2.0/4.0/9.0 GB Hard Disks NOTE: On the Model 180L, you can install either Fast, Wide Differential SCSI or Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI, but not both. ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI RJ45, UTP Twisted Pair Model B132L /B180L only - 10Base T/100Base T ⢠Standard I/O SE SCSI Connector - 8-bit,5 MB/sec synchronous 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous 50-pin, high density SCSI connector Model B132L/B160L - 68-pin, high density Fast, Wide Differential SCSI connector. Model B132L /B180L - 68 pin, high density Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI connector. Two Serial Interfaces RS232C, 9-pin male One Parallel Interface, Centronics, BUSY handshake 25 pin female Audio Line-in, Line-out, Mic, and Headphone Two PS/2 ports (Keyboard and Mouse) ⢠EISA/PCI/GSC Option Slots Slot 1 - GSC or PCI Slot 2 - EISA, GSC, or PCI ⢠User Interface PS/2 Keyboard PS/2 Mouse
11 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs Before powering on your system, you should become familiar with the system unit controls. Figure 1 shows the system unit front panel controls. Figure 1 System Unit Front Panel Controls Storage Devices Power Switch Power LED System LEDs Removable Volume Mute Headset Mic
12 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs System Power Switch Use the Power switch to power the system unit on and off. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Power LED The Power LED lights when the system unit power is on. System LEDs The system LEDs indicate the status of your workstation. In the event of a system problem, the LEDs are lighted in different patterns to indicate error codes. See Chapter 6 for a complete list of the system LED error codes. LED 4 - System Heartbeat LED 3 - SCSI Bus Activity LED 2 - Network Receive LED 1 - Network T ransmit
13 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs Audio Controls Next to the system LEDs are the following audio controls: NOTICE: The V olume Control, Headphone Jack, and Mic (microphone) Jack features of the CD-ROM are supported through software applications only . For more information on the features and electrical speciï¬cations, see âAudio Connectorsâ later in this chapter . Removable Storage Devices The Models B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L support the following removable storage devices: ⢠CD-ROM Disc Drive ⢠DDS-Format T ape Drive ⢠Floppy Diskette Drive NOTICE: Due to space limitations, a DDS-format tape drive and a CD-ROM drive cannot both be mounted in the system at the same time. Also, adding either a DDS tape or CD-ROM takes on internal drive bay , leaving only one internal drive bay available for a hard disk drive. A description of each driveâ s controls and indicators is in the chapter describing that device, later in this book. Headset Jack Accommodates mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diame- ter miniature stereo plug. V olume Control Adjusts the audio output volume to the headset jack or line out. Mic Jack Accommodates microphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug. Mute Button T urns off the audio output to line out and speaker only .
14 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors System Unit Rear Panel Connectors This section describes the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel NOTICE: T o maintain electro-magnetic and radio frequency emissions compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 2 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel. Figure 2 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Audio Line In PS/2 Mouse PS/2 Keyboard HP Parallel LAN-AUI LAN-TP Serial 1 Serial 2 Single-Ended SCSI Fast, Wide or Ultra, Wide SCSI Audio Line Out Power Security Loop TOC Monitor Pullout Card
15 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Security Loop The security loop provides a means of locking the storage tray , with a pad- lock or other locking device, to prevent unauthorized removal from the sys- tem. Audio Connectors Y our workstation has audio input and output capability through external input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an internal speaker . The rear panel contains the Audio IN (stereo line-in) and Audio OUT (stereo line-out) connectors. NOTICE: T o maintain compliance with FCC/CISPR B you must use fully shielded, unbalanced audio cables and plugs. The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers for best quality recording and playback through the external connectors. The following is a summary of the workstation audio features: ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 11.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to -96dB in -1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps Input monitoring: 16-bit linear, 8-bit u-law, or A-law coding ⢠Audio Input Line In Mono microphone (on the front panel) compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage supplied by the
16 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors system). CD-ROM audio (if internal CD-ROM is installed) ⢠Audio Output Line-out Headphone (on the front panel) Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215 The audio electrical speciï¬cation for this workstation are summarized in T able 1 T able 1 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations Frequency Response 25-20,000 Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line In 2.0Vpk/47k ohm Microphone 22mVpk/1k ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Line Out 2.8Vpp/47k ohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50 ohm Speaker (internal) 5.88Vpp/48 ohm Output Impedance Line Out 619 ohm Headphone 1 18 ohm Signal to Noise* Line Out 65 dB Headphone 61 dB Speaker 63 dB Line In 61 dB Microphone 57 dB THD (w nominal load) Line Out -73 dB Headphone -70 dB Speaker -68 dB Line In -75 dB
17 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors *T o convert from dB to number of signiï¬cant bits, use the formula: For example, for 61dB S/N then n=61/6 or approx. 10 signiï¬cant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise. Keyboard Connectors PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface for a keyboard and a mouse to the system. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface protocols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Consult the docu- mentation that accompanies each peripheral device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors Y our workstation has built-in LAN-AUI and LAN-TP (T wisted Pair) con- nectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) network. Connections to ThinLAN net- works require an external transceiver . Y our workstation will autoselect the correct network setting. The Models B132L / B180L allow you to also manu- ally select your LAN conï¬guration. NOTE: Only one of the network connectors can be used at one time. Microphone -73 dB T able 1 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations n dB 20 10 log [] -------------------------- - dB 6 ------ - â ï£ï£¸  =
18 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Serial I/O Connectors You can attach a variety of pointing devices (such as a mouse or trackball), or peripheral devices to the Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the B132L/ B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompa- nies each pointing or peripheral device for specific information concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable. Y ou can set functions such as bit rate, character length, parity , and stop bits. The SIO ports are used as an interface for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 460.8K baud rate. T able 2 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those speciï¬ed in the EIA RS-232 stan- dard. SCSI Connectors Use the narrow single-ended SCSI, and fast, wide differential SCSI, or ultra wide, single-ended SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-format tape drives, disk drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the T able 2 Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD T ransmit Data 4 DTR Data T erminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 R TS Request T o Send 8 CTS Clear T o Send 9 RI Ring Indicator
19 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors documentation that accompanies each SCSI device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C for information about connecting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus with the appropriate terminator . If there are no external SCSI devices, attach a SCSI terminator to the back of the system. TOC Button The TOC (transfer of control) button resets the system and transfers control from the default device to an auxiliary device. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
20 System Overview Monitors Monitors Y ou can use one of the following HP monitors with your workstation: ⢠17-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4330) ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331) Before using your monitor you should become familiar with its controls, connectors, and indicators. For this information, consult the documentation that was packaged with your monitor . The built-in monitor connector is an Enhanced V ideo Connector . An EVC to DB adapter (HP Part Number 8120-6861) is required to use older monitor types. Keyboard The B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L uses a PS/2 keyboard which connects to the PS/2 interface connector on the rear of your workstation. Pointing Devices Y ou can use an HP three-button mouse, a trackball, or other options as point- ing devices using the PS/2 connector or the Serial ports. For instructions on using your particular pointing device, see the manual that came with it. For general information on using three-button mice and on the various cur- sor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE or CDE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation .
21 System Overview Operating System Overview Operating System Overview Y our B132L/B160L workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.2 or greater . Y our B132L / B180L workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.2 or greater with Additional Core Enhancements (ACE). Instant Ignition systems, (systems with preloaded software), have X-win- dows and Hewlett-Packardâ s graphical user interface, HP VUE version 3.0, installed and conï¬gured. Please refer to the âInstant Ignition System Conï¬guration Informationâ sheet that shipped with your system for details on conï¬guration. If you have any questions about Instant Ignition, refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information. NOTICE: When you power on your workstation, a selftest is performed before the system boots.
22 System Overview Important Information Y ou Need to Record Important Information You Need to Record Before you begin using your workstation, take a moment to gather the fol- lowing important information and note it in the appropriate subsection for future use: ⢠LANIC ID ⢠SCSI device ID(s) ⢠Device file used for each SCSI device ⢠Internet Protocol (IP) address ⢠Subnetwork mask NOTICE: For help with these, refer to Using your HP W orkstation . LANIC ID Locate the contents label that comes with the workstation shipping carton. Find the LANIC ID listed there and write it down in the space provided: LANIC ID ____________________________________________ Y ou can also get your LANIC ID by using the lanscan command in a termi- nal window . T o do this, follow these steps: 1 Turn your workstation and monitor on, if you have not already done so. Figure 1 of this chapter shows the location of the power switch on the workstation. See the documentation that came with your monitor for the location of the monitor power switch. Boot the HP-UX operating system. 2 In a terminal window, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/lanscan Y ou will see a table similar to T able 3.
23 System Overview Important Information Y ou Need to Record The LANIC ID in this example is 0800091595EE. Y ou may also obtain the systemâ s LANIC ID from the information menu in the Boot Console Handler . For detailed information see Appendix D. IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information Get the IP address and the subnet mask information for your workstation from either your System Administrator or your Network Administrator and note them here: IP address ____________________________________________________ subnet mask __________________________________________________ T able 3 Sample LANSCAN COMMAND T ABLE Hardware Station Dev Hardware Net-Interface NetMgt Encapsulation Path Address lu State Name Unit State ID Methods 2.0.2 0x0800091595EE 0 UP lan0 UP 4 ETHER IEEE8023
24 System Overview Networking Overview Networking Overview Y our workstation is capable of many more tasks than are described in this owner â s guide. This section gives an overview of some of the networking capabilities of your system and directs you to the appropriate source for more information. Mail Electronic mail allows you to send and receive mail messages on your work- station. For information on setting up and using electronic mail on your workstation, contact your system administrator and also see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation. telnet The telnet application uses the TELNET protocol to communicate with another computer system on the network. The telnet application allows you to log on to the remote system from your workstation. If your system has man pages installed, you may read the online telnet man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man telnet rlogin The rlogin application also allows you to log on to another computer system on the network from your workstation. For more information on rlogin, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt:
25 System Overview Networking Overview man rlogin ftp The ftp application is a user interface to the File T ransfer Protocol. Use ftp to copy ï¬les between your workstation and another computer system on the network. For more information, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man ftp rcp The rcp application allows you to remotely copy ï¬les from another computer system on a network to your workstation. For more information, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man rcp NFS The Network File System (NFS) allows your workstation to access ï¬les on remote computer systems as if they were on your local system. The ï¬le sys- tem on the remote computer system does not have to be compatible with your workstationâ s ï¬le system. For more information, see Installing and Administering NFS Servers and HP-UX System Administration T asks manu- als.
26 System Overview Networking Overview
27 2 Using Your CD-ROM Drive
28 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive This chapter describes how to use your CD-ROM drive. It is divided into the following sections: ⢠CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM media descriptions ⢠Operating the CD-ROM Drive ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Troubleshooting NOTICE Be sure you read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD- ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. NOTICE Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
29 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using the CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface.
30 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions Controls and Features Figure 3 shows and T able 4 describes the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drives. Figure 3 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Jack Headset V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole
31 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions NOTICE The V olume Control, Headset Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD- ROM drive are supported through applications only . T able 4 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Headset Jack Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug into this jack. V olume Control Use the volume control to adjust the audio output volume to the headset jack. Busy Indicator The Busy Indicator lights during a data access operation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) Eject Button Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . Emergency Eject By inserting the end of a paper clip you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power .
32 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of approximately 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and ï¬at spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access ï¬les and data stored on a CD-ROM disc, but you may not write ï¬les or data to a CD-ROM disc. CD-ROM data discs are identical to audio compact discs (CDs) except that they store computer data and information. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Always be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and prolong the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust particles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section âMounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions about mounting a disc.
33 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc Tray This subsection describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc in the CD- ROM drive. Disc Tray Description This CD-ROM is designed to be used in either the horizontal or vertical position, depending on whether your system unit is horizontal or vertical (in the ï¬oor stand). The disc tray has four spring-loaded disc holders that hold the disc in place when the CD-ROM drive is in the vertical position. When the drive is in the horizontal position, the disc holders are not used and are held out of the way by four disc holder retainers. Figure 4 shows the CD- ROM disc tray , and disc holders. Figure 4 CD-ROM Disc Tray Disc Holder Disc Holder Disc Holder
34 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 5 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Check that the workstation is powered on. 2 To open the disc tray, press and release the load/eject button on the CD-ROM drive. 3 Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers. 4 Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 5. 5 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
35 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 6 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instructions on unmounting a disc. 2 Wait until the drive has fully ejected the disc tray. Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers, Then remove the disc from the tray as shown in Figure 6. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. 3 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
36 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 7 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 1 Make sure the three disc holders are disengaged from the disc holder retainers, as shown in Figure 7. Disc Holder A Disc Holder C Disc Holder B Disc Holder D
37 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2 Hold the disc with the label side away from the tray and place the edge of the disc onto disc holders A and B as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 3 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B, and swing the top of the disc in until it is held by disc holders C and D. 4 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
38 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 9 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instruction on unmounting a disc. 2 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B and swing the top of the disc away from disc holders C and D as shown in Figure 9. 3 Remove the disc from disc holders A and B. 4 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
39 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Verifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d sdisk RETURN After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.0 target 8/12.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/12.5 target 8/12.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.2 target 8/16/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/16/5.4 target 8/16/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see your CD-ROM drive it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Problems.â
40 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must ï¬rst mount the disc. This applies to ï¬le system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with ï¬le system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condition that can require rebooting the system. If your workstation is running HP VUE, follow these instructions to mount and unmount a CD-ROM disc as a ï¬le system. If youâre using something other than HP VUE, use the instructions for mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc that come with that product. For more information on conï¬g- uring your CD-ROM drive, see the System Administration T asks manual or online help. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN
41 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 4 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 5 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 6 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. Disks that are unmounted will have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive 8 The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9 Click on OK . 10 The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 11 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK. Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted ï¬le system.
42 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition that may require rebooting the system. 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu.
43 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 7 A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Y es . 8 Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray . Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following hap- pens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1 Light On - The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2 Light Flashing - The light ï¬ashes six times while a read test is per- formed on the disc. 3 Light Off - The light goes of f when the self test is complete.
44 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following condi- tions exist: ⢠A defective disc. ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc). The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light ï¬ashes during normal activity with the system.
45 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD-ROM drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
46 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting
47 3 Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive
48 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive This chapter describes how to use the optional Digital Data Storage (DDS) tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. This chapter provides information on the following: ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Ordering information CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage). Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
49 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions DDS Tape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a single-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capability and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith com- pression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Storage Capacities The maximum storage capacities of different DDS drives with and without data compression are shown in the following tables; T able 5 DDS T ape Drive Capacities Without Data Compr ession T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 90 meter Not Supported 2.0 GB 2.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 4.0 GB T able 6 DDS T ape Drive Capacities With Data Compr ession T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 90 meter Not Supported 4.0 GB 4.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 8.0 GB
50 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Controls and Indicators Figure 10, Figure 1 1, and Figure 12 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 10 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 11 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 12 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
51 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions LEDs This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The two LEDs on the front panels of the DDS drives indicate different activ- ities or problems that occur . Figure 13 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS-DC early model drive. Figure 14 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS- DC later model and DDS-2 drives. Figure 13 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber Key Cassette Drive Meaning Read/Write States Write-Protect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure)
52 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Figure 14 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes LED Warning Conditions The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warn- ing condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high. The drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-Test (Failure) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and con- tact your local service representative. Media Wear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of errors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to determine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green Pulsing Amber Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on 1/4 sec off Key Tape Clean/ Meaning Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Attention Fault Any Any 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off
53 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1 Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2 Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as described in âCleaning the T ape Heads,â later in this chapter . 3 Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Caution) signal dis- played. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced. 4 If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your ï¬les using a new data cassette. 5 If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, back up the ï¬les to a new data cassette, then discard the data cassette. Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently speciï¬ed to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This translates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consistently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multiple passes over sec- tions of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts fre- quently .
54 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Cleaning the Tape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1 Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cas- sette and cleans the heads. At the end of the cleaning cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2 W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times. Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other DDS-format tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data.
55 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write- protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cas- sette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 15. Figure 15 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 15. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette. Push tab right for write. Push tab left for write-pr otect .
56 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Operating the DDS Tape Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette from the DDS tape drive: 1 Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 16. Figure 16 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 2 Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop ï¬ashing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 3 T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 16. The LEDs on the drive ï¬ash on and off. T en to twen- ty seconds later , the data cassette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cas- sette from the drive. Eject Button
57 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Verifying the DDS Tape Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the DDS-format tape drive, as root user , enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d stape After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the fol- lowing: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.3 target 8/16/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see your tape drive, it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
58 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device, and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your tape drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Tape Drives -> . 4 The Tape Drives window opens. 5 In the list of tape drives, click on the desired tape drive to select it. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device ï¬les for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
59 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Archiving Data This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS-format data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command and your tape driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command allows you to save ï¬les to a data cassette, restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system, or list the ï¬les on your data cassette. Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a data cassette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar -cvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression.
60 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory you want the ï¬les to reside in. 3 Enter the following command line to restore data: tar -xvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speciï¬ed, everything on the data cassette is restored. If the tape was made using data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression. Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a data cassette: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to receive a ï¬le listing of the data cassette: tar -tvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam. If the tape was made with data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as sup- porting compression.
61 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt, and fbackup commands. For more information on these commands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command
62 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A - Box of ï¬ve 60-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B - Box of ï¬ve 90-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A - Box of ï¬ve 120-meter DDS data cassettes (not supported on the DDS-DC drives) ⢠HP92283K - Package of two head-cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L - Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
63 4 Using Your 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive
64 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. The information is organized into the following sections: ⢠Using the floppy diskette ⢠Operating the floppy drive ⢠Troubleshooting ⢠Ordering information The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 9.05 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface. NOTICES: When examples of user input are given in this chapter, enter them at the command-line prompt in an HP VUE terminal window or HP-UX shell. Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
65 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Using the Floppy Diskette This section describes basic information needed for using your ï¬oppy dis- kettes. Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-pro- tect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Fig- ure 17. Figure 17 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect ï¬les on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 17. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Push tab up for write. Push tab down for write-pr otect
66 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the ï¬oppy disk drive: 1 Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 18. Figure 18 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2 Push the diskette into the ï¬oppy drive until it clicks into place. 3 T o remove the diskette, push the eject button (Figure 18), then take out the dis- kette. Eject Button
67 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Operating the Floppy Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. Verifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the ï¬oppy drive, use the ioscan command to see which devices are currently in use on your sys- tem. 1 Enter the following at a command prompt: /sbin/ioscan After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the I/O devices it could ï¬nd. If there is a ï¬oppy drive in the list, that listing appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description =========== ============ =================== 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 graphics Graphics 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive
68 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your ï¬oppy drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems->. 3 The Disks and File Systems window opens. 4 In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5 From the Actions menu, click on View More Information A window opens with a list of information for the ï¬oppy drive, including the device ï¬les.
69 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new ï¬oppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new ï¬oppy diskette follow these steps: 1 Log in as root . 2 Make sure that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 17. 3 Insert the diskette into the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4 In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit -i 2 devicefile where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam.
70 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Transferring Data To and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your ï¬oppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your ï¬oppy driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar (tape ï¬le archiver) command saves ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette, restores ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette, or lists ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the ï¬les on a diskette. Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position. 2 Load the formatted ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 3 In a terminal window, enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar -cvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the diskette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette to your system: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window, use the cd command to change to the directory you want the files to reside in: cd directory_path where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory .
71 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive 3 Enter the following command line: tar -xvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the diskette. If you donât specify pathname, everything on the ï¬oppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar -tvf deviceï¬le where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam. All ï¬les on the ï¬oppy diskette are listed.
72 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the command argu- ments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal win- dow: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou can mount the ï¬oppy drive as a ï¬le system using the SAM utility . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a ï¬le system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the ï¬oppy drive, see the man- ual Using HP-UX (B2910-90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your ï¬oppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man cpio For more information on copying to or from DOS ï¬les, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp For more information on listing the contents of DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls For more information on using your ï¬oppy disk drive and ï¬oppy diskettes, refer to the ï¬oppy man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man floppy For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the medi- ainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit
73 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your work- station, you need to reconï¬gure the HP-UX Kernel to add the ï¬oppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the ï¬exible disk driver and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconï¬gure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355-90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910-90001)
74 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your ï¬oppy disk drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro ï¬exible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive, use the following order number: HP-92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) - box of ten diskettes
75 5 Solving Problems
76 Solving Problems This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for service, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . This chapter is divided into the following sections: ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Interpreting LED error codes ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Running system veriï¬cation tests The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 10.2 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface.
77 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Common Problems and Solutions The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the prob- lems. Problems with Powering Up the System T able 7 describes possible problems you may encounter when powering up the system and offers possible solutions. T able 7 Power Up Problems Problem Solution The power LED does not light. Make sure all AC power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working AC outlet. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or ï¬ickers. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appen- dix B for information about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor conï¬guration. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
78 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System T able 8 describes possible problems you may encounter when loading and booting the operating system and offers solutions. T able 8 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two minutes have passed with no sign of system activ- ity . Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination). The system stops or hangs while booting. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
79 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems with the 802.3 Network T able 9 describes possible problems you may encounter with the 802.3 net- work and offers solutions. T able 9 Problems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Cannot reach other sys- tems on the network. Applications that rely on the network will not run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . Network Auto-Negotia- tion fails. Systems can- not connect or establish link. (Models 132L /B180) The following can cause Auto-Negotiation failure: ⢠Non-Category 5 cabling. Cabling must be installed by certified installers. ⢠Improper cable termination. ⢠Maximum cable lengths exceeded. ⢠Incompatibility/Interoperability problems between LAN devices. Check the cabling and interfaces for proper installation and operation. If you know the speed/duplex settings for the connection device, you can also manually set the worksta- tion LAN interface setting using the Boot Console Iterface, see âConï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only)â on page 222. When the workstation fails to establish a link using the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector , the workstation automatically switches from the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector to the AUI connector . Y ou can manually set the LAN interface to the AUI connector using the Boot Console Interface, see âCon- ï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only)â on page 222. If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
80 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive T able 10 describes possible problems you may encounter using the hard disk drive and offers solutions. T able 10 Pr oblems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. Make sure that all the SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
81 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive T able 11 describes a possible problem you may encounter when you use the CD-ROM drive and offers a solution. T able 1 1 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . V erify that the CD is mounted. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section âRunning the System V eriï¬cation T estsâ in this chapter to verify that the CD- ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative
82 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive T able 12 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the DDS tape drive and offers solutions. T able 12 Pr oblems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le name for commands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are try- ing to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section "Running the System V eriï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
83 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive T able 13 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the ï¬oppy disk drive and offers a solution. T able 13 Pr oblems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The ï¬oppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le for com- mands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a ï¬oppy diskette. Use a new ï¬oppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section "Running the System V eriï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the ï¬oppy drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
84 Solving Problems LED Error Codes LED Error Codes This section contains information about the error codes displayed by the LEDs on the systemâ s front panel. If an error occurs during the power-up diagnostics tests, the diagnostics use the front panel LEDs to display a code for the failing component. Figure 19 shows the location of the system unitâ s front panel LEDs. The four amber LEDs indicate system status and error codes. T able 14 shows the LED error codes as they appear on the front panel LEDs. Use these LED codes to determine the failing component. Figure 19 System Unit Front Panel LEDs
85 Solving Problems LED Error Codes T able 14 LED Err or Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description N/A Reserved 7401 No memory found F AUL T Likely cause: SIMMs or pr ocessor boar d N/A Reserved FL T 7000-7F00 Memory Error Fault Likely Cause: Memory SIMMs System console will indicate which SIMM fault occurr ed on FL T 1030-4099 Processor board F AUL T (includes PDH which could be on I/O board.) FL T 5000 - 500F FL T 8000 - 8FFF* FL T CD00 - CDFF I/O System F AUL T *Except backplane faults listed below FL T 8500, 8501 FL T 8C00-8CFF Backplane F AUL T (includes PCI) Any INIT/TEST code INITIALIZA TION and TESTING Note: These two LED codes will alternate to indicate forwar d pr ogr ess: 01 1 1, 1000, 01 1 1,... Any fault not in this table including FL T 1000-101C Unknown F AUL T FL T CBF0 - CBFF FL T 1001 HPMC F AUL T
86 Solving Problems LED Error Codes FL T A088 - A0FF No console/IPL error F AUL T N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Power on value. Indicates processor board fault when this value remains for more than a second following power up. T able 14 LED Err or Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description
87 Solving Problems Dealing with a Boot Failure Dealing with a Boot Failure If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1 Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2 At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation. 3 Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in mnemonic style notation, such as sescsi.6.0 4 If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the ï¬le system or with the hardware. If you suspect a ï¬le system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with ï¬le system failures. If you think that some- thing is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more trouble- shooting information.
88 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests Running System Verification Tests HP-UX uses an on-line diagnostics product called the Support T ools Man- ager that allows system operation veriï¬cations. Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven inter- face (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the on-line man pages by entering the following at the command line prompt: man cstm man mstm man xstm T o access the Support T ools Manager, perform the following steps:
89 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: cstm The following message appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> 2 At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 3 T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 4 Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported. 5 T o exit the Support T ools Manager , enter the following: CSTM> exit If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualiï¬ed service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
90 Solving Problems Device V eriï¬cation Device Verification The ioscan command scans the system and lists the devices that it can ï¬nd. The following command line reports the device ï¬les for the devices it ï¬nds: /usr/sbin/ioscan -fun Enter the following command for more information on the ioscan command: man ioscan The insf command installs device special ï¬les for devices that it ï¬nds con- nected to the system. Enter the following command line to run the insf com- mand: /usr/sbin/insf Enter the following command for more information on the insf command: man insf
91 A Safety and Regulatory Statements
92 Safety and Regulatory Statements This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your B132L/ B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. It provides information on the following topics: ⢠Declaration of conformity ⢠Special video configuration statements ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Safety statements ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠Warnings and cautions
93 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 Declaration of Conformity 1
94 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 2 Declaration of Conformity 2
95 Safety and Regulatory Statements Special Video Conï¬guration Statements Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
96 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Emissions Regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Cana- dian Department of Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa- tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guaran- tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip- ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certiï¬cation tests were conducted with HP-sup- ported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modiï¬cations not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to comply with the re- quirements of the FCC.
97 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations VCCI Class 2 ITE
98 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Compliance Emissions Regulations Compliance Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations state- ments. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom.
99 Safety and Regulatory Statements Acoustics Acoustics Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa<70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19
100 Safety and Regulatory Statements Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following pre- cautions during board unpacking, installation, and conï¬guration: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dis- charged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their protective antistatic bags.
101 Safety and Regulatory Statements Safety Statement Safety Statement This equipment conforms to the following safety standards: ⢠UL 1950 ⢠CSA 950 ⢠IEC 950 ⢠EN 60950
102 Safety and Regulatory Statements Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) The CD ROM mass-storage system is certiï¬ed as a Class-1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radia- tion Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass-storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass-storage system is com- pletely conï¬ned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Visible LEDs The visible LED on this product is classiï¬ed as â Class 1 LED PRODUCTâ in accordance with EN 60825-1.
103 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions
104 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions
105 B Changing Your Workstationâs Hardware Configuration
106 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hard- ware conï¬guration. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation ⢠Removing the main tray assembly ⢠Replacing the main tray assembly ⢠Installing storage devices ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing cache boards ⢠Installing an EISA, GSC, or PCI option board ⢠Installing an optional System Graphics RAM (EGRAM) board ⢠Changing your monitor type CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconï¬guring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your conï¬guration: ⢠Light-duty flat blade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 in.) blade ⢠Needlenose pliers ⢠Torx screwdriver Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
107 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs Checking the SCSI IDs T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 Click on the Terminal Control on the Front Panel of your Workspace. A terminal window opens. 2 Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single-click the left mouse button. 3 Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f
108 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================== bc 8 bc Pseudo Bus Converter 8/0 unknown Processor 8/12 ext_bus GSC Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk HP C3325W 8/12.7 target 8/12.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/0 ext_bus Built-in Parallel Interface 8/16/1 audio Built-in Audio 8/16/4 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk Quantum VP32210 8/16/5.7 target 8/16/5.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16/6 lan Built-in LAN 8/16/7 ps2 Built-in Keyboard/Mouse 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive 8/16/10.2 floppy HP_PC_FDC_FLOPPY 8/20 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/20/2 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/20/5 ba EISA Bus Adapter 8/24 graphics Graphics 62 processor Processor 63 memory Memory 4 You can find out the SCSI IDs currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. For example, the SCSI disk above is listed at address 8/16/5.6.0 which indicates a SCSI address 6. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any SCSI device. Address 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
109 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Preparing Your Workstation This section describes how to prepare your workstation for changing its con- ï¬guration. Use the following procedure to prepare your workstation: 1 Shut down your workstation by typing the shutdown -h command as root user. NOTE: When you press the power button, the workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it powers off the system. However, this is not the recommended method for shutting down your system. 2 When the workstation has completed shutting down, turn off the system unit, turn off the monitor, and any peripheral devices connected to the workstation. 3 Unplug the power cord of the system unit, the monitor, and any peripheral devic- es from ac wall outlets. 4 Unplug the power cord from the back of the system unit. 5 Remove the floor stand from the system unit (if used), as shown in Figure 20.
11 0 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Figure 20 Removing the Floor Stand 6 Lay the system unit on a flat surface, such as a table top. 7 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back of the system unit.
111 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly Removing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the Main T ray Assembly: 1 Shutdown and prepare the workstation as described in Preparing Your Worksta- tion earlier in this appendix. 2 Disconnect all cables and connectors from the front and rear connectors of the system unit. 3 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 4 Remove the four thumbscrews on the rear of the system unit, as shown in Figure 21. Figure 21 Removing Main Tray Assembly 5 Place one hand on the top of the system unit and push, while pulling the handle on the rear panel with your other hand. See Figure 21. 6 Slide the main tray assembly out of the chassis. Thumbscrews Thumbscrews
11 2 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly Replacing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to replace the main tray assembly: 1 Align the main tray assembly with the chassis, aligning the tray with the ridges on the bottom of the case, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 22. Figure 22 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 2 Slide the main tray in until it is fully seated in the chassis. 3 Tighten the four thumbscrews, as shown in Figure 22. NOTICE: T o maintain regulatory agency compliance, verify that the main tray is fully seated and all four thumb screws are completely tightened. Thumbscrews Thumbscrews
11 3 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 4 Reconnect the power cables and any other cables or terminators that you disconnected when opening the workstation. 5 Power on the monitor , any peripheral devices, and the system unit. If you installed a new hard disk drive, go to Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive on page 135. If you installed a new removable media device, refer to the following chap- ters for information on using the device: ⢠Chapter 2 - Using Your CD-ROM Drive ⢠Chapter 3 - Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive ⢠Chapter 4 - Using Your 3.5-inch Floppy Drive
11 4 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing Storage Devices This section describes how to install storage devices in your workstation. Before installing a new storage device, perform the following procedures as described earlier in this appendix: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing Your Workstation ⢠Removing the Main Tray Assembly CAUTION: All storage devices are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the devices, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the storage device kit. Always handle the drive carefully . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of your storage devicesâ SCSI addresses. The host SCSI controllers use SCSI ID 7.
11 5 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Preparing to Install Your Storage Device This section describes information that you need to consider and procedures that you need to perform before installing any storage device. Configuring your Storage Device T able 15 lists the recommended SCSI IDs for internal storage devices. If an existing device already uses one of the suggested IDs, select an alternate ID. NOTICE: The ï¬oppy disk drive is not a SCSI device. Set the jumpers and SCSI IDs according to the installation instructions that came with your device. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI can use addresses in the range 0 through 7, with 7 reserved for the controller . Fast, W ide Differential and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI can use addresses in the range 0 through 15, with 7 reserved for the controller . Determining Your Storage Devices Position Each storage device is restricted as to where in the storage tray it may be installed. Before installing a storage device, use Figure 23 and T able 16 to determine which disk tray position is correct for your device. T able 15 Default SCSI IDs Fast, Wide SCSI and Ultra W ide SCSI 1st Hard Disk Drive ID 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive ID 5 Note: The Fast, W ide SCSI and Ultra W ide controller is set to SCSI ID 7. Single-Ended SCSI CD-ROM Drive ID 2 DDS Drive ID 3 1st Hard Disk Drive ID 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive ID 5 Notes: The ï¬oppy drive is NOT a SCSI device. Each SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7.
11 6 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 23 shows the storage device positions in the disk tray . T able 16 lists what devices are supported in the different disk tray positions. The numbers in the tableâ s left column refer to the position numbers in Figure 23. Figure 23 Disk Tray Positions (Side View) T able 16 Storage Conï¬gurations Disk T ray Position Supported Devices Conditions 3 Floppy Drive The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device. 2 CD-ROM DDS-T ape Single-Ended SCSI Disk Fast W ide SCSI Disk * Ultra W ide SCSI Disk The CD-ROM drive and the DDS tape drive are single- ended SCSI devices. 1 Single-Ended SCSI Disk Fast W ide SCSI Disk * Ultra W ide SCSI Disk * Fast W ide SCSI devices are supported only with the optional Fast W ide SCSI controller . 1 2 3 Front
11 7 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Removing the Storage Tray Before removing the Storage T ray Assembly , perform the procedures described in Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device on page 1 15. NOTICE: The Storage T ray Assembly does not have to be removed from the system unit to access a hard disk drive or the 3.5-inch ï¬oppy drive. If you are installing a hard disk or ï¬oppy drive, proceed directly to Removing the Storage T ray Cover on page 120 . Perform the following steps to remove the storage tray assembly from the Main T ray: 1 Pull the tab and slide the memory retainer toward the front of the main tray to re- move it, as shown in Figure 24. Figure 24 Removing the Memory Retainer
11 8 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Disconnect the power, SCSI and CD Audio cables from the system board and the backplane, as shown in Figure 25. When disconnecting the ï¬oppy cable use the following procedure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. 3 Remove SCSI terminators from rear panel SCSI connectors (if necessary). 4 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 25. Figure 25 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI Retaining Screw Locking Ring Rear Panel SCSI Connectors
11 9 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 Hold the storage tray with both hands and slide it toward the front of the main tray approximately an inch, then lift it straight up to remove it. Figure 26 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly
120 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Removing the Storage Tray Cover T o remove the storage tray cover press in the two cover locking tabs then lift the front end of the cover and slide it forward off of the pins in the rear , as shown in Figure 27. Figure 27 Removing the Storage Tray Cover Proceed to one of the following subsections to install your storage device in the disk tray: ⢠Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive ⢠Installing a Floppy Drive ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position)
121 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive Perform the following procedure to install a CD-ROM or DDS tape drive in the disk tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the storage tray bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt, object to pry it from the front., as shown in Figure 28. Figure 28 Removing a Disk Filler Panel
122 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 From the front of the storage tray, line up the slides on the CD-ROM or DDS tape drive with the slots in the storage tray, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 29. Figure 29 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 3 Push the CD-ROM or tape drive in about half way. 4 Connect the single-ended SCSI data cable and the power cable to the drive. 5 Push the drive in all of the way until you hear and feel the slides snap into place 6 Connect the CD-ROM audio cable to the CD-ROM drive. 7 Feed the CD-ROM audio cable out of the storage tray opening. 8 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
123 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Floppy Drive Perform the following procedure to install a ï¬oppy drive in the disk tray: 1 Remove the floppy filler panel from the top location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt, object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 30. Figure 30 Removing the Floppy Filler Panel
124 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Set the floppy drive in the floppy support tray. Be sure to line up the alignment pin in the tray with the hole in the floppy drive, as shown in Figure 31. Figure 31 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
125 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 3 Connect the floppy data cable to the floppy drive and the system board as shown in, Figure 32. When connecting the ï¬oppy data cable, use the following procedure, as shown in Figure 32: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 32 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 4 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
126 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive: 1 Disconnect the cable from the floppy disk drive, as shown in Figure 33. a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. Figure 33 Disconnecting the Floppy Drive Cable
127 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Lift the rear of the floppy disk carrier, push the carrier toward the rear of the disk tray, then lift the front of the floppy disk carrier from the Storage Tray, as shown in Figure 34. Figure 34 Removing the Floppy Disk Drive Assembly
128 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 3 Align the four feet on the bottom of the disk drive carrier with the square holes in the storage tray, as shown in Figure 35. Figure 35 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 4 Set the drive in the storage tray. 5 Connect the power connector and the appropriate SCSI connector to the drive. 6 Push the drive toward the rear of the tray until the locking tab on the drive carrier snaps into place, as shown in Figure 35.
129 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 7 Replace the ï¬oppy and its carrier by setting the mounting pins near the front of the storage tray in place ï¬rst, then push the carrier toward the front of the storage tray slightly and set the rear mounting pins in place. Figure 36 Replacing the Floppy Drive and Carrier 8 Push down ï¬rmly on the rear of the ï¬oppy carrier to ensure that it is fully locked in place.
130 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 9 Connect the cable to the floppy drive. When connecting the ï¬oppy data cable, use the following procedure, as shown in Figure 37: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector until the blue line is even with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 37 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 10 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
131 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive in position 1: 1 Align the four feet on the bottom of the drive carrier with the square holes in the storage tray, as shown in Figure 38. Figure 38 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 2 Set the drive in the storage tray. 3 Connect the power connector and the appropriate SCSI connector to the drive. 4 Push the drive toward the rear of the tray until the locking tab on the drive carrier snaps into place, as shown in Figure 38. 5 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
132 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray Cover Perform the following procedure to replace the storage tray cover , as shown in Figure 39: 1 Slide the cutouts on the rear of the cover onto the pins on the storage tray . 2 Swing the cover into place. 3 Press down on the front edge of the cover to make sure that the locking tabs on the storage tray fully engage the cover . Figure 39 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 4 If you removed the storage tray, continue with the next section Replacing the Storage Tray on page 133 . If you did not remove the storage tray , follow the instructions in Replacing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 12.
133 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray When replacing the storage tray , use the following procedure: 1 Align the pins on the back panel of the main tray with the holes on the rear of the storage tray and slide the storage tray onto the pins, as shown in Figure 40. Figure 40 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 2 Lower the front of the storage and move it slightly forward to align the pins on its side with the slots on the main tray, as shown in Figure 40. 3 Slide the storage tray towards the rear of the main tray until the pins are fully seat- ed in the main tray slots, as shown in Figure 40. 4 Replace and tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 40. Retaining Screw
134 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 Reconnect the floppy, SE SCSI, power, CD-ROM audio, and FW SCSI cables as shown in Figure 41. Reconnect rear-panel SCSI connector terminators, if neces- sary. When connecting the ï¬oppy cable to the system board, use the following proce- dure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector until the blue line is even with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 41 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
135 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Configuring a Hard Disk Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a ï¬le system using SAM. If you installed a new hard disk drive, follow these instructions to make your new disk usable as a ï¬le system. For more infor- mation about conï¬guring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual. This procedure requires you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . 1 In a terminal window , enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/sam 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems -> . 4 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens, containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 5 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive . 6 The Select a Disk to Add window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your system. 7 Click on OK .
136 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 8 The Set Disk Usage and Options window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 9 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK.
137 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Installing Additional memory Before installing memory modules, perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. When you have completed changing your workstationâ s memory conï¬gura- tion perform the procedure described in Replacing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 12. T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory . ⢠Before you attempt to install additional memory modules in your B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L workstation, use the information described in Appendix D, âBoot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory conï¬guration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory modules before you begin. ⢠You must insert memory modules in pairs of equal size. ⢠Modules should be inserted in the lowest numbered memory pair first then in nu- merical order. For example, install memory in 0A and 0B first, then 1A and 1B, and 2A and 2B. You must also install the largest memory modules first. For ex- ample, install 64 Mbyte module pairs, then 32 Mbyte module pairs, then 16 Mbyte module pairs, and so on. Note that the B180L supports the use of 128 Mbyte modules. Refer to Figure 42 for memory pair numbering and location. ⢠When you have finished installing additional memory modules, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the workstation. Y ou may need to remove existing memory modules and move them to a dif- ferent location when changing your workstationâ s memory conï¬guration. Use the following procedure to remove memory modules. Use the procedure in the subsection entitled Installing Memory Modules on page 141 to install memory modules.
138 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Removing Memory Modules Perform the following steps to remove memory modules: 1 Locate the memory modules on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 Memory Module Location Memory Module Connectors 0B 0A 1B 1A 2B 2A White Ejector Tabs
139 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 43 Figure 43 Removing the Memory Retainer
140 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 3 To remove a memory module, push the ejector tabs on each side of the module. Lift the memory module up and out of the connector and place it on a static-free surface. Figure 44 shows how to remove a memory module. Figure 44 Removing a Memory Module
141 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Installing Memory Modules Perform the following steps to install memory modules: 1 Locate the memory connectors on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 45. Figure 45 Memory Module Location Memory Module Connectors 0B 0A 1B 1A 2B 2A White Ejector Tabs
142 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 46. Figure 46 Removing the Memory Retainer
143 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 3 Close the ejector tabs on each side of the memory connector to lessen the force required to seat the memory module, as shown in Figure 47. 4 Line up the memory module with the guides making sure that the notched end of the memory module is toward the white ejector tab (front of the main tray), as shown in Figure 47. Figure 47 Installing Memory Modules 5 Press firmly and evenly on the memory module to ensure that it is fully seated. 6 Install the memory retainer. 7 To verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on displaying memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty memory module, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >.â White Ejector Tab
144 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing Cache Boards Removing Cache Boards Follow these steps to remove the cache boards from the workstation. 1 Locate the cache boards on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 48. Figure 48 Cache Boards Location 2 To remove a cache board, push the ejector tabs on each side of the board. Lift the cache board up and out of the connector and place it on a static free sur- face. Cache Board Connectors
145 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing Cache Boards Figure 49 Removing a Cache Board
146 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Second Level Cache Boards Installing Second Level Cache Boards Before installing second level cache boards, perform the procedure in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. Follow these steps to install second level cache boards into your worksta- tion. 1 Locate the cache board connectors on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 50. Figure 50 Cache Boards Location Cache Board Connectors
147 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Second Level Cache Boards 2 Open the ejector tabs on each side of the cache connector and line the cache board up with the guides making sure that the keying notches along the connector edge of the board are away from the memory modules, as shown in Figure 51. Figure 51 Installing Cache Boards NOTICE: Y ou must install cache boards in pairs of equal size. 3 Press firmly and evenly on the cache board to ensure that it is fully seated. The ejector tabs will close and engage the notches on the sides of the cache board as you push down. 4 Perform the procedure in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112. Keying Notches
148 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Y our workstation includes two option slots. Option slot 1 supports either PCI or GSC option boards. Option slot 2 supports either PCI, EISA, or GSC option boards. Figure 52 shows the physical layout of the option slots. Figure 52 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2
149 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Graphics Adapter Considerations If you are installing a graphics option, read the information in this section ï¬rst. Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
150 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Graphics Paths graphics(0) is the built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1) and graphics(2) are graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 and 2. When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics (NB), where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. A and B denote the two video output connectors on the dual display adapter . For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 2 would be graphics(2A) and graphics(2B). Graphics Configuration Restrictions The system supports only four graphics displays at a time. A âdisplayâ is a video output port or connector . For example, the Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) is a dual display card. It has two external video connectors so it accounts for two of the maximum of four displays. Install- ing two of these cards accounts for four displays, which is the maximum supported by the system. The built-in graphics adapter accounts for one graphics display ( graphics(0)). If four displays are installed in the option slots, the built-in graphics adapter is automatically disabled. NOTICE: The A4077A Color Graphics Card, A4078A Dual Color Graphics Card, A4079B HCRX-8Z graphics adapter , and the A4071B HCRX-24 graphics adapter with the A4072A Z Accelerator attached are not supported in the B Class workstations.
151 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Installing the Option Board Before installing option boards you must perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. Follow these steps to install a PCI, EISA, or GSC option board into your workstation: 1 Push in the locking tab and slide the option board support bracket toward the rear of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 53. 2 Remove the blank plate retaining screw, then remove the blank plate, as shown in Figure 53. Figure 53 Removing the Option Board Support Bracket and Blank Plate Blank Plate Support Bracket
152 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 3 Slide the board into the slot, as shown in Figure 54. 4 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 5 Use the blank plate retaining screw to secure the option board, as shown in Figure 54. Figure 54 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board
153 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 6 If you are installing an EISA or GSC option board, you must use a ballpoint pen tip, or other blunt instrument, to remove the PCI adapter from the correct slot po- sition on the option board support bracket, as shown in Figure 55. Figure 55 Removing the PCI Adapter
154 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 7 Place the option board support bracket over the edge of the option board and slide it into the slot on the power supply until the locking tab snaps into place, as shown in Figure 56. Figure 56 Replacing the Option Board Support Bracket 8 Replace the main tray assembly as described in Replacing the Main Tray Assem- bly on page 112.
155 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery Replacing the Battery 1 Remove the main tray as described in Removing the Main Tray Assembly on page 111. 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 57 Figure 57 Removing the Memory Retainer
156 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 3 Disconnect the cables from the system board and the optional fast, wide SCSI adapter, as shown in Figure 58. When disconnecting the ï¬oppy cable use the following procedure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. 4 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 58. Figure 58 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
157 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 5 Hold the storage tray with both hands and slide it toward the front of the main tray approximately an inch, then lift it straight up to remove it. Figure 59 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly
158 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 6 Lift the clip and slip the battery out of its holder, as shown in Figure 60. NOTICE: Note the orientation of the battery. Make sure that you put the new battery in place with the positive ( ) side facing up. Figure 60 Removing the Battery 7 Insert the new battery in the holder with the positive ( ) side facing up. (Only use HP part number 1420-0314 or equivalent.) CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . A TTENTION: Il y a danger dâexplosion sâil y a replacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou dâun type recommandé par le constructeur . Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
159 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 8 Align the pins on the back panel of the main tray with the holes on the rear of the storage tray and slide the storage tray onto the pins, as shown in Figure 61. Figure 61 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 9 Lower the front of the storage tray and move it slightly forward or backward to align the pins on its sides with the slots on the main tray, as shown in Figure 61. 10 Slide the storage tray towards the rear of the main tray until the pins are fully seat- ed in the main tray slots, as shown in Figure 61. 11 Replace and tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 61.
160 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 12 Reconnect the floppy, SE SCSI, power, CD-ROM audio, and FW SCSI cables as shown in Figure 62. When connecting the ï¬oppy cable to the system board, use the following proce- dure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 62 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 13 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112. Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
161 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module Before you can install the EGRAM module you must perform the following procedures: ⢠Removing the Main Tray Assembly on page 111 ⢠Removing the Storage Tray on page 117 Perform the following procedure to install the EGRAM module: 1 Install the standoffs into the four holes on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 63. Figure 63 Installing the Optional EGRAM Module
162 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module 2 Line up the connector on the EGRAM module and the connector on the CPU board while at the same time aligning the standoffs to the holes in the EGRAM module, as shown in Figure 63. 3 Connect the EGRAM board to the CPU board. Press down firmly on the connec- tor area and near the standoffs to make sure that the module is fully seated and that the standoffs are fully engaged with the EGRAM module. 4 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Storage Tray on page 133 5 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112
163 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller Before you can install the FWD SCSI controller (B132L/B160L only) you must perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assem- bly on page 1 1 1. NOTE: Y ou cannot use both the Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI and the Fast Wide Dif ferential SCSI option at the same time. Perform the following procedure to install the FWD SCSI controller: 1 Install the three standoffs, as shown in Figure 64. 2 Line up the connector on the FW SCSI controller and the connector on the CPU board while at the same time aligning the standoffs to the holes in the FWD SCSI controller, as shown in Figure 64. Figure 64 Installing the Optional FWD SCSI Controller
164 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 3 Connect the FWD SCSI controller to the CPU board by pressing firmly on the connector area and near the standoffs to make sure that the FWD SCSI controller is fully seated and that the standoffs are fully engaged with the FWD SCSI con- troller. 4 Remove the storage tray cover by pressing in the two cover locking tabs then lift- ing the front end of the cover and sliding it forward off of the pins in the rear , as shown in Figure 65. Figure 65 Removing the Storage Tray Cover
165 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 5 Remove the two screws and remove the blank plate from the rear panel, as shown in Figure 66. Figure 66 Removing the Blank Plate Blank Plate
166 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 6 Connect the end of FWD SCSI cable to the FWD SCSI controller making sure that the red line on the cable is toward the rear (away from the fans) of the main tray, as shown in Figure 67. Figure 67 Installing the FWD SCSI Cable 7 Set the ferrite bead into the slot on the side of the storage tray. Make sure that the cable is dressed so that it will not be damaged by the storage tray cover 8 Use the two hex standoffs to install the external connector on the end of the FWD SCSI cable into the rear panel of the storage tray, as shown in Figure 67. 9 Secure the cable in the cable clip so that it does not interfere with the disk drives, as shown in Figure 67. Ferrite Bead Cable Clip To FWD SCSI Controller Red Line External Connector
167 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 10 Slide the cutouts on the rear of the storage tray cover onto the pins on the storage tray and swing the cover into place, as shown in Figure 68. 11 Press down on the front edge of the cover to make sure that the locking tabs on the storage tray fully engage the cover . Figure 68 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 12 If you are not connecting any external devices to the external FWD SCSI connec- tor you must connect the FWD SCSI terminator. 13 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112
168 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing Your Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a different type, you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support it. There are two ways to reconï¬gure your workstation to support a different monitor type: Setting the Monitor Type from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters before you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: W ait 2 seconds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab (only press T ab once) to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. The system cycles through the supported monitor types. Until the system tries a monitor type that is compatible with your monitor , the display is unreadable. When you are able to read the information displayed, press the Enter key to stop the system from trying other monitor types. The system displays infor- mation similar to the following: MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz This is type 12 of 15 types. Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type:
169 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype The system queries you to save the new monitor type. If the monitor type displayed is correct, press Y to save this monitor type. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz This is type 12 of 15 types. Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type: Press [y] to save this monitor type: If this is not the correct monitor type, press any other key to continue the search. Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the following procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
170 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype
171 C SCSI Connections
172 SCSI Connections This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer Sys- tem Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 B132L/ B132L / B160L/180L workstation. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports NOTICES When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. If no external devices are connected to the external SCSI connectors on the rear panel of the workstation, a SCSI terminator must be installed.
173 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences SCSI Bus Differences A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external SCSI devices running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are 4-mm DDS-format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W inches- ter hard disk drives. There are three types of SCSI buses available with this workstation - a nar- row single-ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) bus, and a fast, wide differential SCSI (FWD SCSI) bus or an ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI bus. T able 17 shows the speciï¬cation differences between these SCSI buses, and T able 18 shows the SCSI addresses, ID numbers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix single-ended, fast, wide and ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. T able 17 SCSI Bus Differ ences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Optional Single-Ended 8 bits 8 6.0 meters (19.6 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 5 Mbytes per second Fast, Wide 16 bits 16 25 meters (82 feet) Internal and external Optional Up to 20 Mbytes per second Ultra, Wide-SE 16 bits 16** 2.0 meters (6.56 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 40 Mbytes per second * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on both buses. ** Only 2 external devices allowed (total of 4 devices).
174 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences T able 18 SCSI Bus Addr esses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SE SCSI Address SCSI ID Number Priority 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8-bit Devices Single-Ended SCSI Bus 16-bit Devices Fast, W ide SCSI Bus
175 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Restrictions This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and Terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Narrow Single-Ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Fast, W ide Differential SCSI devices: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI devices: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length
176 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP devices. Use of other cables can result in signiï¬cant problems with system operation. The NSE SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of NSE SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). The FWD SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of FWD SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). The ultra, wide-SE SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of ultra, wide-SE SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your conï¬guration. If you are daisy-chaining NSE SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining FWD SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices together , use the fol- lowing cables: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length NOTICE See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
177 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions Connectors and Terminators Any NSE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 50-pin high-den- sity thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the systems external connector . Any FWD SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high- density thumb screw connector on both ends. Any ultra, wide-SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw connector on both ends . NOTICE: If no external devices are connected to any SCSI connector on the back panel, a SCSI terminator must be installed. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order a C2905A, 68-pin terminator for the FWD SCSI bus, a C2904A, 50-pin high density terminator for the NSE SCSI bus or a C2972A, 68-pin terminator for the ultra, wide-SE SCSI bus from Hewlett-Packard. SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to the number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the addi- tional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own conï¬guration constraints: ⢠NSE SCSI bus ⢠Optional FWD SCSI bus ⢠Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the narrow-SE SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape devices per system. T able 19 shows conï¬guration constraints for each NSE SCSI device type. If the system has an internal CD-ROM drive, tape drive or hard disks con- nected to the SE SCSI bus, you must count them as SE SCSI devices.
178 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended peripherals on the same bus. Fast Wide Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints FWD SCSI devices do not work with NSE SCSI devices. T able 20 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each FWD SCSI device type. T able 19 Narr ow-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints NSE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (two internal) 7 CD-ROM Drives (one internal) 1 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 2 9-track T ape Drives 2 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives 1 Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) 1 Maximum Number of NSE SCSI Devices 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three NSE SCSI drive address. Each ad- dress must be accounted for in the maximum number of SE SCSI devices al- lowed. T able 20 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints FWD SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed FWD SCSI Disk Drive (two internal) 15 FWD SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7
179 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI, and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra W ide-SE SCSI devices do not work with NSE SCSI or FWD SCSI devices. T able 20 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each Ultra SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. T able 21 Ultra W ide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Disk Drive (two internal) 2 Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 1
180 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Determining SCSI Bus Length This section helps you to determine the total length of the NSE SCSI bus and the FWD SCSI bus and the Ultra, wide-SE bus. NSE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total NSE SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external NSE SCSI devices, and NSE SCSI inter- connect cables) using T able 22: 1 Find all of your external NSE SCSI devices in the first column. In the third col- umn, write the NSE SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your devices. NOTICE In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the NSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â 3 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4 Add the subtotals together and write the total in the Total NSE SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE The total length of the NSE SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
181 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Subtotals: __________ __________ T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length = __________ (T otal NSE SCSI bus length not to exceed 6 meters [19.6 feet]) FWD SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the FWD SCSI bus on your system, using T able 23. 1 List all of your internal FWD SCSI disk drives in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal FWD SCSI bus that corre- spond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the FWD SCSI interconnect ca- bles you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line T able 22 Bus Length W orksheet for NSE SCSI Bus NSE SCSI Device Internal NSE SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) Device Internal Length meters (feet) External Cable Length meters (feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A A2655A 0.3 (1.0) C1520B 0.2 (0.7) C1521B 0.2 (0.7) C1700C 1.1 (3.6) C1701C 0.3 (1.0) C1704C 0.0 (0.0) C1705C 0.0 (0.0) C2213A 1.5 (4.9) C2217T 1.3 (4.3)
182 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total FWD SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the FWD SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal FWD SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the UW -SE SCSI bus on your system, using T able 23. 1 List all of your internal UW -SE SCSI disk drives in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal UW -SE SCSI bus that corre- spond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the UW -SE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) T able 23 Bus Length W orksheet for FW SCSI Bus FWD SCSI Device Internal FWD SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A C3034T 1.0 (3.3) C3035T 1.0 (3.3) C3036T 1.0 (3.3)
183 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total UW -SE SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the UW -SE SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal UW -SE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otalUW -SE SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal UW -SE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) T able 24 Bus Length W orksheet for UW SCSI Bus UWSE SCSI Device Internal UWSE SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3)?
184 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Assigning SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description =========================================================== 8 bc Pseudo Bus Converter 8/0 unknown Processor 8/12 ext_bus GSC Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk HP C3325W 8/12.7 target 8/12.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/0 ext_bus Built-in Parallel Interface 8/16/1 audio Built-in Audio 8/16/4 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk Quantum VP32210 8/16/5.7 target 8/16/5.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16/6 lan Built-in LAN 8/16/7 ps2 Built-in Keyboard/Mouse 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive 8/16/10.2 floppy HP_PC_FDC_FLOPPY 8/20 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/20/1 hil Built-in HIL 8/20/2 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/20/5 ba EISA Bus Adapter 8/24 graphics Graphics 62 processor Processor 63 memory Memory 2 Determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading.
185 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs NSE SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a NSE SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your NSE SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 25: 1 Write in the NSE SCSI device ID of any internal drives in Table 25 2 Write in the type of external drives (SE SCSI, FW SCSI or Ultra SCSI) currently connected to your system under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 3 Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 4. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the NSE SCSI bus. 4 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller
186 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs 5 Write in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives in Table 25. 6 Write in the type of external single-ended drives currently connected to your workstation under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 7 Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 8. T able 25 Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Internal Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) External Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal System Drives: System SCSI Drive(s) ____________________ ____________________ CD-ROM Drive (if present, uses ID No.2) ____________________ N/A 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No.1) ____________________ N/A External Device Drives N/A ____________________ 1st __________________________ N/A ____________________ 2nd __________________________ N/A ____________________ 3rd __________________________ N/A ____________________ 4th ___________________________ N/A ____________________ 5th ___________________________ N/A ____________________ 6th __________________________ N/A ____________________ 7th __________________________ N/A ____________________ NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 single-ended SCSI devices (internal and external) con- nected to the system.
187 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI IDs, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus 8 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller . FWD SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 26. 1 Write in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, Wide SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID un- der the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide differential SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID.
188 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 26. 1 Write in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new ultra, wide single-ended SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. T able 26 Fast, W ide SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Fast, Wide SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device _____________________________ _____________________________ 2nd Internal Device ____________________________ _____________________________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a fast, wide bus.
189 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 27 Ultra W ide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Ultra Wide SE SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device _____________________________ _____________________________ 2nd Internal Device ____________________________ _____________________________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to an Ultra, Wide SE SCSI bus.
190 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports Connecting to the SCSI Ports This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (single- ended and fast, wide). SCSI Port Connection The system contains three (3) external SCSI connectors: ⢠Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Connector ⢠Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Connector ⢠Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Connector Figure 69 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Figure 69 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators SE SCSI Connector FW SCSI or UW SCSI Connector
191 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports NOTICE: If no external devices are connected to the SCSI connectors on the back panel, a SCSI terminator must be installed. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order a C2905A, 68-pin terminator for the FWD SCSI bus, a C2904A, 50- pin high density terminator for the NSE SCSI bus or a C2972A, 68- pin high density terminator for the Ultra, W ide, Single-Ended SCSI bus.
192 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports
193 D The Boot Console Interface
194 The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console interface and how to use them. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Configure and display LAN setting ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
195 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menu-driven boot console interface that allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA, GSC, and PCI slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available. The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he, or ? and the menu or command you want help on.
196 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Main Menu ----------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>]Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/commands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system ------ Main Menu: Enter command >
197 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Configuration Menu -------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display boot-related information BootTimer [0 - 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig Display or set LAN configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current monitor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
198 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Information Menu ---------------------------------------------- Command Description ----------- ----------- ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display boot-related information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display built-in system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Information Menu: Enter command >
199 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Service Menu -------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- ChassisCodes [<proc>] Display chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>] Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Service Menu: Enter command >
200 The Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system administrator . 1 Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2 Use the shutdown -h command as root user to shut down your system. When shutdown is complete, press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICES: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or otherwise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3 When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the boot console Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the following mes- sages: Processor is booting from first available device.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. NOTICE: If you are using a power-saving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4 Press a key. You will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
201 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Booting Your Workstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HP-UX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operating sys- tem that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDS-format tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in Mnemonic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDS- format tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0 The operating system on the speciï¬ed device is used to start your workstation. ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ ear- lier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with ISL (Y,N,Q)>
202 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Answering yes ( y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the speciï¬ed device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter n. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt: ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your ï¬le systems have bootable oper- ating systems, you can ï¬nd them with the sear ch IPL command.
203 The Boot Console Interface Searching for Bootable Media Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccess- ing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠To continue the display, press Ctrl Q. ⢠To halt the search, press any other key These ï¬ow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl device_type Where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the optional fast, wide differential SCSI bus, or the built-in ultra, wide- SE SCSI bus (Model B180L only). sescsi is the built-in single-ended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the built-in LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
204 The Boot Console Interface Resetting Y our Workstation Resetting Your Workstation T o reset your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > reset T o reset your workstation to its predeï¬ned values, follow the directions in "Accessing the Boot Console Interface" earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Conï¬guration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Conï¬guration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
205 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able 28. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speciï¬ed device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path T able 28 System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usually a DDS-format tape device) console or con Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstationâ s primary ASCII input device
206 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able 29. T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 28. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 28 and path is the speciï¬cation of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as described in T able 29). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: T able 29 Mnemonic Style Notation I/O T ype Speciï¬cation Format Built-in FWSCSI fwsci. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in UWSCSI fwsci. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Built-in SCSI sescsi. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Optional gsc n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Optional pci n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in LAN lan. server_addr ess .init_timeout.io_timeout
207 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0
208 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different type of monitor , you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬g- uration. This command is available in Conï¬guration Menu of the boot con- sole interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬guration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the conï¬guration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; monitor The correct usage for setting the graphics conï¬guration is: monitor graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are: graphics(0) - The built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1 ) and graphics(2) - Graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 and 2. and type is the numerical monitor type
209 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics( NB). Where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 1 would be graphics(1A) and graphics(1B). NOTICE: There are graphics conï¬guration restrictions of which you must be aware when adding graphics adapters or reconï¬guring your graphics devices. For details on graphics conï¬guration restrictions, see the subsection â Graphics Configuration Restrictionsâ in Appendix B. Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor conï¬guration for your system from the Con- ï¬guration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Conï¬guration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and there monitor types conï¬gured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the built-in graphic adapter graphics(0) is conï¬gured. The monitor type for graphics(0) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 72 Hz.
210 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the follow- ing: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed; MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 72Hz Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 --------user defined------- Configuration Menu: Enter command >
21 1 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the follow- ing; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your system. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n - nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card.
212 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light ï¬ashes. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legibly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter . MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ----------- ---- ---- ---- ---------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press Y to save this mon- itor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed: To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 seconds)... T o restart the monitor selection process, press T AB .
213 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
214 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows a memory conï¬guration table with properly-installed and conï¬gured memory (Sample Output 1). T o display the current memory conï¬guration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and conï¬guration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The ï¬rst listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and conï¬gured memory modules. The second listing shows the information for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed of conï¬gured.
215 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are properly installed and conï¬gured MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 128MB Configured 1a/b 64MB Configured --------- TOTAL 192MB Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
216 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Status of the System I/O Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all built-in I/O devices and optional I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the Information Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the built-in and optional I/O devices is displayed, similar to the example below . I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ------------ ------- ------------------------- ---------- ---- ---- ---- ---- 8 8 Bus Converter built-in 5040 0000 0x00 0x00 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge built-in 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O built-in 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter built-in 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel built-in 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio built-in 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 built-in 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI built-in 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN built-in 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy built-in 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 HIL 8/20/1 HIL built-in 0170 7300 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port built-in 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 built-in 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ---- ---- ------- 20/5/1 Unknown EISA card or slot empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class -------- -------------------------------- --- ------------------ built-in 8/0/19/0 0 SCSI built-in 8/0/20/0 0 Ethernet
217 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto sear ch are variables stored in your workstationâ s non- volatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these ï¬ags to new value, the change takes ef fect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search ï¬ags, type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot console user interface. The state of the auto sear ch ï¬ag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto sear ch is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot device is not available. If auto search is off , your workstation will default to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto search ï¬ags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off.
218 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Built-in fast, wide SCSI devices SCSI card in slot 1 SCSI card in slot 2 Built-in single-ended SCSI devices Built-in LAN bootp servers NOTICE: Fast wide SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
219 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Security Mode Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECur e ï¬ag is a variable stored in non-volatile memory . (Non-volatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this ï¬ag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECur e ï¬ag is set to on , autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regard- less of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure ï¬ag, enter the following com- mand: secure T o set the SECure ï¬ag on or of f, enter one of the following: secure on secure off
220 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing during its power-on self tests. This enables your workstation to complete its boot process quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by performing a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off), more extensive memory testing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, causing the boot pro- cess to take longer . If you are experiencing difï¬culty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
221 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the LAN Station Address Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your worksta- tion to other users. For example, if your workstation is to become a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identi- ï¬es the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadeci- mal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009-789abc The address is for the systemâ s built-in LAN.
222 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) Configure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) The LanConï¬g command conï¬gures and displays the current LAN settings. The hardware system supports 10Base-T , 100Base-T and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec or 10 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex), operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u, (this is the default and recommended setting) type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the following at the prompt:
223 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTE: The LAN setting defaults to LAN-TP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LAN-AUI setting. Also note that the new lan configuration settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command
224 The Boot Console Interface Displaying System Information Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revision and speed, cache size, memory size, ï¬ag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Information Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
225 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM information for the speciï¬ed fault type. T o display PIM information for a speciï¬c fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim processor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim - gives all fault types pim 0 - HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type - fault type information on processor
226 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information
227 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root direc- tory (â/â) and ending with the filename itself. See also file, filename, path- name . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access per- missions . active window The window that is re- ceiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active win- dow, anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The ac- tive window is said to have the âkey- board focus.â ANSI The American National Stan- dards Institute, a non-profit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by na- tional industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on. attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v. To make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strict- ly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, ca- pable of representing 2-color images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A ser- vice provided by a short program, stored in the read-only memory of your work- station, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory. Partner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless worksta- tions. See also boot ROM. boot console interface The interactive firmware that enables you to interact with the hardware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operat- ing system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, dis- play information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A read-only memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and producing a standard display. bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental character-code unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CDE The Hewlett-Packard Common Desktop Environment. CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory. See also CD-ROM disc, CD- ROM drive . CD-ROM disc CD-ROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, ex-
228 Glossary cept that they store data. CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter, and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CD-ROM drive A random-access, read-only, mass-storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for read- ing data optically and an embedded con- troller with a SCSI interface. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory . click To press and release a mouse but- ton. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse but- tons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations con- nected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, per- forms as a file-system server for the clus- ter clients. See also cluster client, cluster node , cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HP-UX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server. See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, performs as a server to the cluster. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster server . cluster server A workstation that pro- vides file access, login access, file trans- fer, printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command . command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HP-UX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell . command option Information you pro- vide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke
Glossary 229 combination used as a shorthand way of specifying commands. To enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control key while pressing another key. cpu See Central Processing Unit . CRX color graphics Expanded graph- ics capability offering 24-plane color, 24-plane Z-buffered color, or 48-plane Z-buffered color capability. current directory See current work- ing directory . current session The work and process- es that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session. current working directory The direc- tory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory. cursor The small blinking box dis- played in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE ter- minal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisy-chaining A method of connect- ing devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cas- settes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automat- ic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window. Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. To display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager but- ton on the Workspace, then click on Col- or. directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HP-UX organizational structure. Basically, it is a file that stores names and links to files and other direc- tories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk , CD-ROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation
230 Glossary can use the disk of its partner worksta- tion or other workstations. If necessary, it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other work- stations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node , workstation . double click To press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag To press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CD-ROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop To release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . EISA (Extended Industry Standard Architecture) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their AT series computers. environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment variables . environment variables The set of de- fined shell variables (some of which are PATH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corpora- tion, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based. fast, differential SCSI An 8-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and driv- ers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 10 MB per second. See also fast-wide SCSI , single- ended standard SCSI , Small Comput- er System Interface . fast-wide SCSI A 16-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and drivers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also fast, differential SCSI , single- ended standard SCSI , Small Comput- er System Interface . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory, filename. file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directo- ry. Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that deter- mines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferenc- es. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file ,
Glossary 231 pathname . file server A workstation whose prima- ry task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data. file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. firmware The control software that is embedded in ROM and is always resi- dent despite the status of the operating system. It handles the booting of the sys- tem, initialization of I/O, and starts the loading of the operating system. floppy diskette A thin, record-shaped plate that stores data on its magnetic sur- faces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. HCRX color graphics Accelerated 8- plane or 24-plane graphics. See also CRX color graphics . Help Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable rep- resenting the home directory. This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. Typically, this is /users/ login , or /home/login , where login is your username. See also home directo- ry . home directory A shorthand way of re- ferring to a frequently used directory, al- most always the login directory. host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol ad- dress . HP-UX cluster See cluster node , clus- ter server . HP Visual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X Window system), en- abling you to control your workstation by directly manipulating graphical ob- jects instead of by typing commands at a command-line prompt. HP VUE See HP Visual User Envi- ronment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âiconizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. What- ever processes are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is
232 Glossary iconized. iconify See iconize . iconize To turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon. Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give infor- mation to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also out- put device . input window The window that dis- plays a programâs prompt and any com- mands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol address (IP ad- dress) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a network. Also referred to as the IP ad- dress, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as -a. IP address See internet protocol ad- dress . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code re- sponsible for managing the computerâs resources. The kernel controls the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network . LAN station address See local area network station address . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you spec- ify a link as a pathname or part of a path- name, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v. To join together two or more objects. local area network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to com- municate with each other. The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Services software. local area network system address The label that uniquely identifies the lo- cal area network (LAN) connection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in To initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This cre- ates your first user process. See also username . login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory. See also home di- rectory . Login Manager The program that con- trols the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the userâs username and pass-
Glossary 233 word. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system. menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pull-down or pop-up menus for that ap- plication. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize . mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory, or link. A name can in- clude various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character. See also pathname . network Two or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster, workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver, the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and net- work media access. node A network computer (worksta- tion). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with another node. See also disked workstation , diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster. See also cluster , node . nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after work- station power is turned off. object Any file, directory, or link in the network. See also directory , file , link , pathname . operating system The program that su- pervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HP-UX system, including the ker- nel and all HP-UX commands. See also kernel . option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output de- vices. See also input device. output window The window that dis- plays a process response to your com- mand. parent directory A directory that con- tains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory. See also sub- directory . partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also diskless workstation .
234 Glossary password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occa- sionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user ac- count . path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destination ob- ject. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every di- rectory name between the starting point and the destination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also re- ferred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID . pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer,â the pointer shows the mouse lo- cation on the screen. The pointerâs shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE Workspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow. process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a pro- gram currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the operating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HP-UX commands and routines consist of pro- grams. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a real-life push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory. ROM Read-only memory. root See superuser . scroll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a win- dow that allows the user to view infor- mation that does not fit within the window. SCSI See Small Computer System In- terface . server A program that controls all ac- cess to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A command-line interpreter pro-
Glossary 235 gram used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HP-UX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key, and C shells. Some- times referred to as a command interpret- er. See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you give the system to execute a utility pro- gram or shell script. See also shell script , utility program . shell script A file that contains com- mands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multi-user state to system administration state. SIMM See Single In-line Memory Module . single-ended standard SCSI An 8-bit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, differ- ential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , Small Computer System Interface . Single In-line Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar. The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfac- ing a computer to multiple, disparate high-speed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, singly or in combi- nation. See also fast, differential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI . standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster. See also cluster. Style Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides the ability to custom- ize various aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior, and access to other worksta- tions. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below, another directory. The directory above the subdi- rectory is called the parent directory. The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory. See also parent directo- ry . superuser A user with permission to enter the top-level directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. To âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now as- suming the role of system administrator. You can do this either by logging into the system as root, or by typing su at a com- mand-line prompt. You must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person re- sponsible for system and network instal- lation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel pro- cess by a user program.
236 Glossary system name See internet protocol address . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emu- lates a complete display terminal. Termi- nal windows are typically used to fool non-client programs into believing they are running in their favorite terminal. When not running programs or execut- ing operating system commands, termi- nal windows display the command-line prompt. See also HP Visual User Envi- ronment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the win- dow object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person authorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâs password. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Your system administrator assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login procedure when the sys- tem displays the login prompt. See also user account . username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The user- name is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software re- quiring secure entry. utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequently required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a di- rectory. See also command, shell com- mand . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of win- dows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also Workspace Manager . Window Manager The HP VUE pro- gram that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current work- ing directory . Workspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic ob- jects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP Visual User Environment , terminal window . Workspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and op-
Glossary 237 eration of windows on the HP VUE Workspace. The Workspace Manager is a special Window Manager. See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphics-ori- ented computer having high speed and high memory capacity. A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a monitor, and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation.
238 Glossary
239 Symbols $HOME,, 231 A absolute pathname,, 227 access permissions,, 227 acoustics regulations, 99 active window,, 227 ANSI,, 227 archiving data listing files,, 60 restoring files,, 60 saving to a cassette,, 59 archiving data,, 59 argument,, 227 attachment unit interface (AUI),, 227 audio connectors, 15 controls, 13 conversion formula, 17 electrical specifications, 16 features, 15 headset jack, 13 inputs, 15 mic jack, 13 mute button, 13 outputs, 16 volume control, 13 auto boot,, 217 auto boot, changing state,, 217 auto search,, 217 auto search, changing state,, 217 auto-negotiation failure, 79 B back up,, 227 battery replacing the, 155 bitmap,, 227 boot console accessing,, 200 features,, 195 menus,, 195 boot console interface,, 227 boot failure dealing with, 87 boot ROM,, 227 boot,, 227 bootable media searching for,, 203 bootstrap service,, 227 bus length determining, 180, 181, 182 fast-wide differential SCSI, 181, 182 single-ended SCSI-2, 180 byte,, 227 C cables SCSI devices and, 175 cautions and warnings, 103 CD-ROM disc busy light during self test,, 43 mounting and unmounting,, 40 mounting using SAM,, 40 unmounting using SAM,, 42 CD-ROM disc,, 227 CD-ROM discs caring for,, 32 CD-ROM drive controls and features,, 29 description,, 29 installing, 121 problems using, 81 troubleshooting,, 45 verifying operation,, 39 CD-ROM drive,, 228 CD-ROM media,, 32 CD-ROM,, 227 Central Processing Unit (CPU),, 228 child directory,, 228 click,, 228 cluster client,, 228 cluster node,, 228 cluster server,, 228 cluster,, 228 command argument,, 228 command interpreter,, 228 command option,, 228 command,, 228 commands all,, 224 auto,, 217 boot,, 201 cd,, 70 eisa,, 216 fastboot,, 220, 222, 223 lanaddress,, 221 mediainit,, 69 memory,, 214 path,, 205 pim,, 225 reset,, 204 search,, 203 tar,, 59 configuration changing your workstation, 109 SCSI device constraints, 177 configuration,, 228 connections SCSI devices, 172 SCSI ports, 190 connectors audio, 15 HP parallel I/O, 17 keyboard, 17 mouse, 17 network, 17 power cord, 19 PS/2, 20 rear panel, 14 SCSI devices, 18, 177 serial I/O, 18 control key sequence,, 228 controls audio, 13 TOC button, 19 cpu,, 229 CRX color graphics,, 229 current directory,, 229 current working directory,, 229 cursor,, 229 D daisy-chaining,, 229 data cassettes cleaning heads,, 54 media life,, 53 media restrictions,, 54 ordering information,, 62 setting write-protect tab,, 55 DDS tape drive controls and indicators,, 49 Index
240 Index installing, 121 LED code warning conditions high humidity,, 52 media wear,, 52 selft-test,, 52 LED codes,, 51 loading and unloading data cassette,, 56 problems using, 82 troubleshooting,, 62 using device files,, 58, 68 verifying operation,, 57 DDS tape drive,, 229 DDS tape drives operating,, 56 default,, 229 devices boot failures and, 87 installing storage, 114 internal storage, 9 pointing, 18 removable storage, 13 dialog box,, 229 directory,, 229 disk,, 229 disked workstation,, 229 diskette,, 229 diskettes ordering information,, 74 diskless booting,, 229 diskless workstation,, 229 documentation conventions, 4 double click,, 230 drag,, 230 drive,, 230 drop,, 230 E EISA, 10 EISA boards, 10 installing, 148 EISA slots displaying status,, 216 EISA,, 230 electrostatic discharge, 100 emissions regulations, 96 regulations compliance, 98 environment variables,, 230 environment,, 230 ETHERNET,, 230 F fast, differential SCSI,, 230 fastboot disabling,, 220 displaying status,, 220, 222 enabling,, 220 fastboot,, 220 fast-wide SCSI,, 230 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 96 file access permissions,, 230 File Manager,, 230 file server,, 231 file system,, 231 file,, 230 filename,, 230 floor stand removing, 110 floppy disk drive disconnecting cables, 126 installing, 123 problems using, 83 removing, 127 floppy diskette formatting,, 69 inserting and removing,, 66 listing files,, 71 restoring files from,, 70 saving files to,, 70 setting write-protect,, 65 transferring data,, 70 floppy diskette,, 231 floppy drive operating,, 67 verifying configuration,, 67 floppy drive,, 231 floppy driver configuring,, 73 ftp, 25 G GSC option boards, 10 installing, 148 H hard disk drive configuring, 135 installing in front position, 126 installing in rear position, 131 problems using, 80 hard disk drive,, 231 hard disk,, 231 HCRX color graphics,, 231 Help Manager,, 231 home directory,, 231 host name,, 231 host,, 231 HP Visual User Environment,, 231 HP VUE,, 231 HP-UX cluster,, 231 I icon,, 231 iconify,, 232 iconize,, 232 IDs checking SCSI, 107 Initial System Loader,, 232 input audio, 15 input device,, 232 input window,, 232 internet protocol address,, 232 invisible filename,, 232 IP address,, 232 ISL,, 232 K kernel,, 232 L LAN auto-negotiation, 222 cabling, 79 setting, 222 settings, 79 LAN station address,, 221, 232 LAN station address,displaying,, 221 LAN,, 232 LANIC ID, 22 LEDs error codes, 84
Index 241 power, 12 problems, 77 system, 12 link,, 232 local area network system address,, 232 local area network,, 232 log in,, 232 login directory,, 232 Login Manager,, 232 login script,, 233 M mail, 24 main tray assembly removing, 111 replacing, 112 man commands ftp, 25 rcp, 25 rlogin, 24 telnet, 24 memory, 9 displaying configuration,, 214 installing additional, 137 installing modules, 141 nonvolatile,, 217 removing modules, 138 menu bar,, 233 minimize button,, 233 monitor displaying type,, 208, 209 setting type at power on, 212 setting type,, 210 monitors changing type of, 168 setting type at power on, 168 setting type from boot console interface, 168 types of, 20 mouse, 20 connector, 17 mouse pointer,, 233 N name,, 233 network, 10 auto-negotiation failure, 79 connector, 17 network controller,, 233 network,, 233 networking ftp, 25 mail, 24 NFS, 25 overview, 24 problems, 79 rcp, 25 rlogin, 24 telnet, 24 NFS, 25 node name,, 233 node,, 233 nonvolatile memory,, 217, 233 O object,, 233 operating system, 9 overview, 21 problems loading and booting, 78 operating system,, 233 option boards installing, 151 option,, 233 ordering information cleaning cassettes,, 62 data cassettes,, 62 diskettes,, 74 output device,, 233 output window,, 233 P parent directory,, 233 partner node,, 233 password,, 234 path displaying,, 205 setting,, 206 path,, 205, 234 pathname,, 234 permissions,, 234 PID,, 234 PIM information,displaying,, 225 pointer,, 234 power cord connector, 19 power switch, 12 precautions electrostatic discharge, 100 problems loading and booting, 78 networking, 79 operating system, 78 power up, 77 solving, 77 using CD-ROM drive, 81 using DDS tape drive, 82 using floppy disk drive, 83 using hard disk drive, 80 process ID,, 234 process,, 234 processor performance, 9 program,, 234 prompt,, 234 push button,, 234 R RAM,, 234 rcp, 25 regulations emissions, 96 emissions compliance, 99 regulatory and safety statements, 92 related manuals, 3 release documents, 2 revision history, 3 rlogin, 24 ROM,, 234 root,, 234 S safety laser, 102 standards, 101 safety and regulatory statements, 92 SAM using to configure a hard disk drive, 135 scroll bar,, 234 SCSI devices assigning IDs, 184 bus differences, 173 cables, 175 checking IDs, 107 configuration constraints, 177 connecting to ports, 190 connections, 172
242 Index connectors, 18 connectors and terminators, 177 determining bus length, 180 restrictions, 175 SCSI,, 234 security loop, 15 serial I/O connectors, 18 server,, 234 session,, 234 shell command,, 235 shell script,, 235 shell,, 234 shutdown,, 235 SIMM,, 235 Single In-line Memory Module,, 235 single-ended standard SCSI,, 235 slider,, 235 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI),, 235 standalone,, 235 storage devices configuring, 115 determining position of, 115 installing, 114 removable, 13 storage tray removing, 117 replacing, 133 storage tray cover removing, 120 replacing, 132 Style Manager,, 235 subdirectory,, 235 superuser,, 235 system administrator,, 235 system call,, 235 system information,displaying,, 224 system name,, 236 system verification tests running, 88 T tar command, additional information,, 61 telnet, 24 terminal window,, 236 tests running system verification, 88 title bar,, 236 TOC button, 19 trackball, 20 transceiver,, 236 U user account,, 236 user ID,, 236 user interface, 9, 10 username,, 236 utility program,, 236 utility,, 236 W warnings and cautions, 103 Window Manager,, 236 window,, 236 working directory,, 236 Workspace Manager,, 236 Workspace,, 236 workstation booting,, 201 changing the hardware configuration of, 106 features, 9 preparing to change configuration, 109 resetting to predefined parameters, 204 resetting,, 204 security loop, 15 Workstation,, 237
 Hewlett-Packard Co. 1997 Printing History First Printing: Septermber 1997 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETT -P ACKARD MAKES NO W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MA TERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FIT- NESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be lia- ble for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copy- right. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written con- sent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by gov- ernment is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents iii Preface 1 Audience 2 Safety and Regulatory Statements 2 Release Document(s) 2 Related Manuals 3 Revision History 3 Documentation Conventions 4 Problems, Questions, and Suggestions 5 1 System Overview Product Description 9 System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs 1 1 System Power Switch 12 Power LED 12 System LEDs 12 Audio Controls 13 Removable Storage Devices 13 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 14 Security Loop 15 Audio Connectors 15 Keyboard Connectors 17 PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors 17 HP Parallel I/O Connector 17 802.3 Network Connectors 17 Serial I/O Connectors 18 SCSI Connectors 18 TOC Button 19
iv Contents Power Cord Connector 19 Monitors 20 Keyboard 20 Pointing Devices 20 Operating System Overview 21 Important Information Y ou Need to Record 22 LANIC ID 22 IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information 23 Networking Overview 24 Mail 24 telnet 24 rlogin 24 ftp 25 rcp 25 NFS 25 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 29 CD-ROM Drive 29 Controls and Features 30 CD-ROM Media 32 Caring for CD-ROM Discs 32 Operating the CD-ROM Drive 33 Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc T ray 33 Disc T ray Description 33 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 34 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 35 Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 36 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a V ertically Mounted Drive 38
Contents v V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 39 Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 40 Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 40 Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 42 Reading the Busy Light 43 T roubleshooting 45 3 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 49 DDS Drive 49 Storage Capacities 49 Controls and Indicators 50 LEDs 51 LED W arning Conditions 52 Data Cassettes 53 Media Life 53 Cleaning the T ape Heads 54 Media Restrictions 54 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 55 Operating the DDS T ape Drive 56 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 56 V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 57 Using Device Files 58 Archiving Data 59 W riting to a Data Cassette 59 Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 60 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 60 Further Command Information 61 T roubleshooting 62 Ordering Information 62
vi Contents 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 65 Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 65 Inserting and Removing a Diskette 66 Operating the Floppy Drive 67 V erifying the Floppy Drive Conï¬guration 67 Using Device Files 68 Formatting a New Diskette 69 T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 70 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 70 Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 70 Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 71 For More Information 72 Conï¬guring the Floppy Driver 73 T roubleshooting 74 Ordering Information 74 5 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 77 Problems with Powering Up the System 77 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 78 Problems with the 802.3 Network 79 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 80 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 81 Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 82 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 83 LED Error Codes 84 Dealing with a Boot Failure 87 Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 88
Contents vii Device V eriï¬cation 90 A Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 93 Declaration of Conformity 2 94 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 95 For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: 95 Emissions Regulations 96 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 96 VCCI Class 2 ITE 97 97 Emissions Regulations Compliance 98 Acoustics 99 Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV 99 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions 100 Safety Statement 101 Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) 102 V isible LEDs 102 W arnings and Cautions 103 B Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardwar e Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs 107 Preparing Y our W orkstation 109
viii Contents Removing the Main T ray Assembly 1 1 1 Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 1 12 Installing Storage Devices 1 14 Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device 115 Conï¬guring your Storage Device 1 15 Determining Y our Storage Devices Position 115 Removing the Storage T ray 1 17 Removing the Storage T ray Cover 120 Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format T ape Drive 121 Installing a Floppy Drive 123 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 126 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 131 Replacing the Storage T ray Cover 132 Replacing the Storage T ray 133 Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive 135 Installing Additional memory 137 Removing Memory Modules 138 Installing Memory Modules 141 Removing Cache Boards 144 Installing Second Level Cache Boards 146 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 148 Graphics Adapter Considerations 149 Special V ideo Conï¬guration Statements 149 Graphics Paths 150 Graphics Conï¬guration Restrictions 150 Installing the Option Board 151 Replacing the Battery 155 Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module 161 Installing the Optional Fast W ide Differential SCSI Controller 163
Contents ix Changing Y our Monitor T ype 168 Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface 168 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 168 Changing the Console to External T erminal 169 C SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences 173 SCSI Restrictions 175 Cables 175 Connectors and T erminators 177 SCSI Conï¬guration Constraints 177 Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 177 Fast W ide Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 178 Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints 179 Determining SCSI Bus Length 180 NSE SCSI Bus Length 180 FWD SCSI Bus Length 181 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI Bus Length 182 Assigning SCSI Device IDs 184 NSE SCSI Device IDs 185 FWD SCSI IDs 187 Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI IDs 188 Connecting to the SCSI Ports 190 SCSI Port Connection 190 D The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features 195 Accessing the Boot Console Interface 200
x Contents Booting Y our W orkstation 201 Searching for Bootable Media 203 Resetting Y our W orkstation 204 Displaying and Setting Paths 205 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype 208 The Monitor Command 208 Displaying the Current Monitor Conï¬guration 209 Setting the Monitor T ype 210 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On 212 Changing the Console to External T erminal 213 Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration 214 Memory Information Sample 1 215 Displaying the Status of the System I/O 216 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags 217 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode 219 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode 220 Displaying the LAN Station Address 221 Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) 222 Displaying System Information 224 Displaying PIM Information 225
Contents xi Figures System Unit Front Panel Controls 11 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 14 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features 30 CD-ROM Disc Tray 33 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 34 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 35 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 36 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 37 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 38 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators 50 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes 51 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes 52 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape 55 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 56 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette 65 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 66 System Unit Front Panel LEDs 84 Removing the Floor Stand 110 Removing Main Tray Assembly 111 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 112 Disk Tray Positions (Side View) 116 Removing the Memory Retainer 117 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly 118 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly 119 Removing the Storage Tray Cover 120 Removing a Disk Filler Panel 121 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 122
xii Contents Removing the Floppy Filler Panel 123 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive 124 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 125 Disconnecting the Floppy Drive Cable 126 Removing the Floppy Disk Drive Assembly 127 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 128 Replacing the Floppy Drive and Carrier 129 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 130 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 131 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 132 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 133 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 134 Memory Module Location 138 Removing the Memory Retainer 139 Removing a Memory Module 140 Memory Module Location 141 Removing the Memory Retainer 142 Installing Memory Modules 143 Cache Boards Location 144 Removing a Cache Board 145 Cache Boards Location 146 Installing Cache Boards 147 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit 148 Removing the Option Board Support Bracket and Blank Plate 151 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 152 Removing the PCI Adapter 153 Replacing the Option Board Support Bracket 154 Removing the Memory Retainer 155 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly 156 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly 157
Contents xiii Removing the Battery 158 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 159 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 160 Installing the Optional EGRAM Module 161 Installing the Optional FWD SCSI Controller 163 Removing the Storage Tray Cover 164 Removing the Blank Plate 165 Installing the FWD SCSI Cable 166 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 167 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators 190
xiv Contents T ables Audio Electrical Specifications 16 Serial I/O Pins 18 Sample LANSCAN COMMAND TABLE 23 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Features 31 DDS Tape Drive Capacities Without Data Compression 49 DDS Tape Drive Capacities With Data Compression 49 Power Up Problems 77 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 78 Problems with the 802.3 Network 79 Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 80 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 81 Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive 82 Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 83 LED Error Codes 85 Default SCSI IDs 115 Storage Configurations 116 SCSI Bus Differences 173 SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities 174 Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 178 Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 178 Ultra Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints 179 Bus Length Worksheet for NSE SCSI Bus 181 Bus Length Worksheet for FW SCSI Bus 182 Bus Length Worksheet for UW SCSI Bus 183 Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs 186 Fast, Wide SCSI Device Drives and Device ID 188 Ultra Wide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID 189 System Paths 205 Mnemonic Style Notation 206
1 Preface
2 This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 B132L/B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the HP 9000 Model B132L/B160L/B180L Hardware Installation Card . Audience This guide is intended for HP 9000 B132L/B132L /B160L/B180L worksta- tion users. Safety and Regulatory Statements See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory state- ments that apply to this workstation. Release Document(s) Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your system or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication.
3 Related Manuals If you are using HP-UX version 10.20, refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠HP 9000 Model B132L/B160L/B180L Hardware Installation Card (A4190- 90010) ⢠Using Your HP Workstation (A2615-90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355-90050) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355-90053) ⢠HP Visual User Environment Userâs Guide (B1171-90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355-90038) ⢠HPUX X User Environment Userâs Guide ⢠Precision Architecture RISC HP 9000 Series 700 Diagnostics Manual (92453- 90010) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales ofï¬ce. Revision History The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4190-90023 E0997 First printing.
4 Documentation Conventions Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following symbolic conventions. user-supplied values Italic words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user input In examples, information that the user enters appears in color . output Information that the system dis- plays appears in this type- face . literal values Bold words or characters in for- mats and command descriptions represent commands or keywords that you must use literally . Path- names are also in bold. KEY T ext with a line above and a line below denotes a key on your key- board, or a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display . (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.)
5 Pr oblems, Questions, and Suggestions If you have any problems, questions, or suggestions with our hardware, soft- ware, or documentation, please call 1-888-301-5932 (US & Canada) or con- tact the HP Response Center for your country .
6
7 1 System Overview
8 System Overview This chapter introduces the HP 9000 B132L/B132L /B160L/B180L work- stations. Its purpose is to familiarize you with your workstation and its con- trols and indicators. The information is presented in the following sections: ⢠Product Description ⢠System unit front panel controls and LEDs ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboard ⢠Pointing devices ⢠Operating system overview ⢠Important information you need to note ⢠Networking overview
9 System Overview Product Description Product Description The B Class workstations have the following key features: ⢠Processor Performance Model B132L - 132 Mhz (33 Mhz GSC) Model B132L - 132 Mhz (33 Mhz GSC) Model B160L - 160 Mhz (40 Mhz GSC) Model B180L - 180 Mhz (36 Mhz GSC) ⢠Operating System Model B132L/B160L - Native HP-UX (version 10.20 or greater) Model B132L /B180L - Native HP-UX (version 10.20 or greater ACE) ⢠User Interface HP VUE graphical user interface HP CDE graphical user interface ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Optional Graphics: Model B132L/B160L - HP VISUALIZE-24Z, 24-plane graphics HP VISUALIZE-8/24, Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane 3D graphics Model B132L /B180L - HP VISUALIZE-8/24/48/48XP HP VISUALIZE-EG/DualEG ⢠Main Memory Model B132L/B160L - 6 slots of main memory allowing 32 to 768 MBytes Model B132L /B180L - 6 slots of main memory allowing 32 to 768 MBytes ⢠Second Level Cache 2 slots allowing 1 MB of second level cache ⢠Internal Storage Devices 3.5-inch Slimline Floppy Disk Drive (not a SCSI Device) Single-Ended SCSI Hard Disks (up to two) Single-Ended SCSI CD-ROM Drive Single-Ended SCSI 2.0/4.0/8.0 GB, 4-mm DDS-Format Tape Drive Fast, Wide SCSI Hard Disk Drives (requires optional FW SCSI adapter)
10 System Overview Product Description Model B132L /B180L only - Ultra-SCSI 2.0/4.0/9.0 GB Hard Disks NOTE: On the Model 180L, you can install either Fast, Wide Differential SCSI or Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI, but not both. ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI RJ45, UTP Twisted Pair Model B132L /B180L only - 10Base T/100Base T ⢠Standard I/O SE SCSI Connector - 8-bit,5 MB/sec synchronous 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous 50-pin, high density SCSI connector Model B132L/B160L - 68-pin, high density Fast, Wide Differential SCSI connector. Model B132L /B180L - 68 pin, high density Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI connector. Two Serial Interfaces RS232C, 9-pin male One Parallel Interface, Centronics, BUSY handshake 25 pin female Audio Line-in, Line-out, Mic, and Headphone Two PS/2 ports (Keyboard and Mouse) ⢠EISA/PCI/GSC Option Slots Slot 1 - GSC or PCI Slot 2 - EISA, GSC, or PCI ⢠User Interface PS/2 Keyboard PS/2 Mouse
11 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs Before powering on your system, you should become familiar with the system unit controls. Figure 1 shows the system unit front panel controls. Figure 1 System Unit Front Panel Controls Storage Devices Power Switch Power LED System LEDs Removable Volume Mute Headset Mic
12 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs System Power Switch Use the Power switch to power the system unit on and off. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Power LED The Power LED lights when the system unit power is on. System LEDs The system LEDs indicate the status of your workstation. In the event of a system problem, the LEDs are lighted in different patterns to indicate error codes. See Chapter 6 for a complete list of the system LED error codes. LED 4 - System Heartbeat LED 3 - SCSI Bus Activity LED 2 - Network Receive LED 1 - Network T ransmit
13 System Overview System Unit Front Panel Controls and LEDs Audio Controls Next to the system LEDs are the following audio controls: NOTICE: The V olume Control, Headphone Jack, and Mic (microphone) Jack features of the CD-ROM are supported through software applications only . For more information on the features and electrical speciï¬cations, see âAudio Connectorsâ later in this chapter . Removable Storage Devices The Models B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L support the following removable storage devices: ⢠CD-ROM Disc Drive ⢠DDS-Format T ape Drive ⢠Floppy Diskette Drive NOTICE: Due to space limitations, a DDS-format tape drive and a CD-ROM drive cannot both be mounted in the system at the same time. Also, adding either a DDS tape or CD-ROM takes on internal drive bay , leaving only one internal drive bay available for a hard disk drive. A description of each driveâ s controls and indicators is in the chapter describing that device, later in this book. Headset Jack Accommodates mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diame- ter miniature stereo plug. V olume Control Adjusts the audio output volume to the headset jack or line out. Mic Jack Accommodates microphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug. Mute Button T urns off the audio output to line out and speaker only .
14 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors System Unit Rear Panel Connectors This section describes the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel NOTICE: T o maintain electro-magnetic and radio frequency emissions compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 2 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel. Figure 2 System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Audio Line In PS/2 Mouse PS/2 Keyboard HP Parallel LAN-AUI LAN-TP Serial 1 Serial 2 Single-Ended SCSI Fast, Wide or Ultra, Wide SCSI Audio Line Out Power Security Loop TOC Monitor Pullout Card
15 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Security Loop The security loop provides a means of locking the storage tray , with a pad- lock or other locking device, to prevent unauthorized removal from the sys- tem. Audio Connectors Y our workstation has audio input and output capability through external input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an internal speaker . The rear panel contains the Audio IN (stereo line-in) and Audio OUT (stereo line-out) connectors. NOTICE: T o maintain compliance with FCC/CISPR B you must use fully shielded, unbalanced audio cables and plugs. The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers for best quality recording and playback through the external connectors. The following is a summary of the workstation audio features: ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 11.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to -96dB in -1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps Input monitoring: 16-bit linear, 8-bit u-law, or A-law coding ⢠Audio Input Line In Mono microphone (on the front panel) compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage supplied by the
16 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors system). CD-ROM audio (if internal CD-ROM is installed) ⢠Audio Output Line-out Headphone (on the front panel) Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215 The audio electrical speciï¬cation for this workstation are summarized in T able 1 T able 1 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations Frequency Response 25-20,000 Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line In 2.0Vpk/47k ohm Microphone 22mVpk/1k ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Line Out 2.8Vpp/47k ohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50 ohm Speaker (internal) 5.88Vpp/48 ohm Output Impedance Line Out 619 ohm Headphone 1 18 ohm Signal to Noise* Line Out 65 dB Headphone 61 dB Speaker 63 dB Line In 61 dB Microphone 57 dB THD (w nominal load) Line Out -73 dB Headphone -70 dB Speaker -68 dB Line In -75 dB
17 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors *T o convert from dB to number of signiï¬cant bits, use the formula: For example, for 61dB S/N then n=61/6 or approx. 10 signiï¬cant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise. Keyboard Connectors PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface for a keyboard and a mouse to the system. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface protocols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Consult the docu- mentation that accompanies each peripheral device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors Y our workstation has built-in LAN-AUI and LAN-TP (T wisted Pair) con- nectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) network. Connections to ThinLAN net- works require an external transceiver . Y our workstation will autoselect the correct network setting. The Models B132L / B180L allow you to also manu- ally select your LAN conï¬guration. NOTE: Only one of the network connectors can be used at one time. Microphone -73 dB T able 1 Audio Electrical Speciï¬cations n dB 20 10 log [] -------------------------- - dB 6 ------ - â ï£ï£¸  =
18 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors Serial I/O Connectors You can attach a variety of pointing devices (such as a mouse or trackball), or peripheral devices to the Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the B132L/ B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompa- nies each pointing or peripheral device for specific information concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable. Y ou can set functions such as bit rate, character length, parity , and stop bits. The SIO ports are used as an interface for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 460.8K baud rate. T able 2 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those speciï¬ed in the EIA RS-232 stan- dard. SCSI Connectors Use the narrow single-ended SCSI, and fast, wide differential SCSI, or ultra wide, single-ended SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-format tape drives, disk drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the T able 2 Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD T ransmit Data 4 DTR Data T erminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 R TS Request T o Send 8 CTS Clear T o Send 9 RI Ring Indicator
19 System Overview System Unit Rear Panel Connectors documentation that accompanies each SCSI device for speciï¬c information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C for information about connecting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus with the appropriate terminator . If there are no external SCSI devices, attach a SCSI terminator to the back of the system. TOC Button The TOC (transfer of control) button resets the system and transfers control from the default device to an auxiliary device. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
20 System Overview Monitors Monitors Y ou can use one of the following HP monitors with your workstation: ⢠17-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4330) ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331) Before using your monitor you should become familiar with its controls, connectors, and indicators. For this information, consult the documentation that was packaged with your monitor . The built-in monitor connector is an Enhanced V ideo Connector . An EVC to DB adapter (HP Part Number 8120-6861) is required to use older monitor types. Keyboard The B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L uses a PS/2 keyboard which connects to the PS/2 interface connector on the rear of your workstation. Pointing Devices Y ou can use an HP three-button mouse, a trackball, or other options as point- ing devices using the PS/2 connector or the Serial ports. For instructions on using your particular pointing device, see the manual that came with it. For general information on using three-button mice and on the various cur- sor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE or CDE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation .
21 System Overview Operating System Overview Operating System Overview Y our B132L/B160L workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.2 or greater . Y our B132L / B180L workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.2 or greater with Additional Core Enhancements (ACE). Instant Ignition systems, (systems with preloaded software), have X-win- dows and Hewlett-Packardâ s graphical user interface, HP VUE version 3.0, installed and conï¬gured. Please refer to the âInstant Ignition System Conï¬guration Informationâ sheet that shipped with your system for details on conï¬guration. If you have any questions about Instant Ignition, refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information. NOTICE: When you power on your workstation, a selftest is performed before the system boots.
22 System Overview Important Information Y ou Need to Record Important Information You Need to Record Before you begin using your workstation, take a moment to gather the fol- lowing important information and note it in the appropriate subsection for future use: ⢠LANIC ID ⢠SCSI device ID(s) ⢠Device file used for each SCSI device ⢠Internet Protocol (IP) address ⢠Subnetwork mask NOTICE: For help with these, refer to Using your HP W orkstation . LANIC ID Locate the contents label that comes with the workstation shipping carton. Find the LANIC ID listed there and write it down in the space provided: LANIC ID ____________________________________________ Y ou can also get your LANIC ID by using the lanscan command in a termi- nal window . T o do this, follow these steps: 1 Turn your workstation and monitor on, if you have not already done so. Figure 1 of this chapter shows the location of the power switch on the workstation. See the documentation that came with your monitor for the location of the monitor power switch. Boot the HP-UX operating system. 2 In a terminal window, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/lanscan Y ou will see a table similar to T able 3.
23 System Overview Important Information Y ou Need to Record The LANIC ID in this example is 0800091595EE. Y ou may also obtain the systemâ s LANIC ID from the information menu in the Boot Console Handler . For detailed information see Appendix D. IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information Get the IP address and the subnet mask information for your workstation from either your System Administrator or your Network Administrator and note them here: IP address ____________________________________________________ subnet mask __________________________________________________ T able 3 Sample LANSCAN COMMAND T ABLE Hardware Station Dev Hardware Net-Interface NetMgt Encapsulation Path Address lu State Name Unit State ID Methods 2.0.2 0x0800091595EE 0 UP lan0 UP 4 ETHER IEEE8023
24 System Overview Networking Overview Networking Overview Y our workstation is capable of many more tasks than are described in this owner â s guide. This section gives an overview of some of the networking capabilities of your system and directs you to the appropriate source for more information. Mail Electronic mail allows you to send and receive mail messages on your work- station. For information on setting up and using electronic mail on your workstation, contact your system administrator and also see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation. telnet The telnet application uses the TELNET protocol to communicate with another computer system on the network. The telnet application allows you to log on to the remote system from your workstation. If your system has man pages installed, you may read the online telnet man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man telnet rlogin The rlogin application also allows you to log on to another computer system on the network from your workstation. For more information on rlogin, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt:
25 System Overview Networking Overview man rlogin ftp The ftp application is a user interface to the File T ransfer Protocol. Use ftp to copy ï¬les between your workstation and another computer system on the network. For more information, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man ftp rcp The rcp application allows you to remotely copy ï¬les from another computer system on a network to your workstation. For more information, see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man rcp NFS The Network File System (NFS) allows your workstation to access ï¬les on remote computer systems as if they were on your local system. The ï¬le sys- tem on the remote computer system does not have to be compatible with your workstationâ s ï¬le system. For more information, see Installing and Administering NFS Servers and HP-UX System Administration T asks manu- als.
26 System Overview Networking Overview
27 2 Using Your CD-ROM Drive
28 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive This chapter describes how to use your CD-ROM drive. It is divided into the following sections: ⢠CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM media descriptions ⢠Operating the CD-ROM Drive ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Troubleshooting NOTICE Be sure you read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD- ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. NOTICE Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
29 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using the CD-ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface.
30 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions Controls and Features Figure 3 shows and T able 4 describes the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drives. Figure 3 CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features Jack Headset V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole
31 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions NOTICE The V olume Control, Headset Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD- ROM drive are supported through applications only . T able 4 CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Featur es Control/Featur e Purpose Headset Jack Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5-mm diameter miniature stereo plug into this jack. V olume Control Use the volume control to adjust the audio output volume to the headset jack. Busy Indicator The Busy Indicator lights during a data access operation and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) Eject Button Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and insert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . Emergency Eject By inserting the end of a paper clip you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power .
32 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of approximately 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and ï¬at spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access ï¬les and data stored on a CD-ROM disc, but you may not write ï¬les or data to a CD-ROM disc. CD-ROM data discs are identical to audio compact discs (CDs) except that they store computer data and information. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Always be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and prolong the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust particles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section âMounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions about mounting a disc.
33 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM in the Disc Tray This subsection describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc in the CD- ROM drive. Disc Tray Description This CD-ROM is designed to be used in either the horizontal or vertical position, depending on whether your system unit is horizontal or vertical (in the ï¬oor stand). The disc tray has four spring-loaded disc holders that hold the disc in place when the CD-ROM drive is in the vertical position. When the drive is in the horizontal position, the disc holders are not used and are held out of the way by four disc holder retainers. Figure 4 shows the CD- ROM disc tray , and disc holders. Figure 4 CD-ROM Disc Tray Disc Holder Disc Holder Disc Holder
34 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 5 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Check that the workstation is powered on. 2 To open the disc tray, press and release the load/eject button on the CD-ROM drive. 3 Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers. 4 Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 5. 5 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
35 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Horizontally Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 6 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Horizontally Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instructions on unmounting a disc. 2 Wait until the drive has fully ejected the disc tray. Be sure the disc holders are held away from the disc by the disc holder retainers, Then remove the disc from the tray as shown in Figure 6. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. 3 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
36 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Loading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: Figure 7 Releasing the Disc Holder Retainers 1 Make sure the three disc holders are disengaged from the disc holder retainers, as shown in Figure 7. Disc Holder A Disc Holder C Disc Holder B Disc Holder D
37 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2 Hold the disc with the label side away from the tray and place the edge of the disc onto disc holders A and B as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 Placing a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive 3 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B, and swing the top of the disc in until it is held by disc holders C and D. 4 To close the disc tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
38 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Unloading a CD-ROM Disc in a Vertically Mounted Drive Perform the following steps to unload a disc from the CD-ROM drive: Figure 9 Removing a CD-ROM Disc From a Vertically Mounted Drive 1 Press the eject button to eject the disc tray from the drive. If the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to eject the disc tray. NOTICE: Y ou must unmount the disc before eject it from the drive. Refer to the subsection, âUnmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM,â for instruction on unmounting a disc. 2 Press down gently against the spring tension of disc holders A and B and swing the top of the disc away from disc holders C and D as shown in Figure 9. 3 Remove the disc from disc holders A and B. 4 To close the Disc Tray, push the front of the disc tray gently towards the drive until it closes by itself.
39 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Operating the CD-ROM Drive Verifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d sdisk RETURN After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.0 target 8/12.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/12.5 target 8/12.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.2 target 8/16/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/16/5.4 target 8/16/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see your CD-ROM drive it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Problems.â
40 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must ï¬rst mount the disc. This applies to ï¬le system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with ï¬le system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condition that can require rebooting the system. If your workstation is running HP VUE, follow these instructions to mount and unmount a CD-ROM disc as a ï¬le system. If youâre using something other than HP VUE, use the instructions for mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc that come with that product. For more information on conï¬g- uring your CD-ROM drive, see the System Administration T asks manual or online help. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN
41 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 4 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 5 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 6 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. Disks that are unmounted will have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive 8 The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9 Click on OK . 10 The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 11 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK. Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted ï¬le system.
42 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted ï¬le system, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition that may require rebooting the system. 1 Log in as root. If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam RETURN 3 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices ->. 4 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems ->. 5 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 6 Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu.
43 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 7 A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Y es . 8 Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray . Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following hap- pens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1 Light On - The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2 Light Flashing - The light ï¬ashes six times while a read test is per- formed on the disc. 3 Light Off - The light goes of f when the self test is complete.
44 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following condi- tions exist: ⢠A defective disc. ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc). The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light ï¬ashes during normal activity with the system.
45 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD-ROM drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
46 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive T roubleshooting
47 3 Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive
48 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive This chapter describes how to use the optional Digital Data Storage (DDS) tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. This chapter provides information on the following: ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Ordering information CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage). Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
49 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions DDS Tape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is either a DDS-DC (early or later model) or a DDS-2 tape drive with a 3.5-inch form factor , data compression, and a single-ended SCSI interface. Both drives incorporate data compression capability and are high-capacity , high transfer-rate devices for data storage on tape. W ith com- pression, the DDS-DC drives can store up to 4 GB of data on a 90 meter tape and the DDS-2 drive can store up to 8 GB of data on a 120 meter tape. Storage Capacities The maximum storage capacities of different DDS drives with and without data compression are shown in the following tables; T able 5 DDS T ape Drive Capacities Without Data Compr ession T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 1.3 GB 90 meter Not Supported 2.0 GB 2.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 4.0 GB T able 6 DDS T ape Drive Capacities With Data Compr ession T ape Length Full Height 5 1/4 DDS T ape Drive DDS-DC T ape Drives DDS-2 T ape Drive 60 meter 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 2.6 GB 90 meter Not Supported 4.0 GB 4.0 GB 120 meter Not Supported Not Supported 8.0 GB
50 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Controls and Indicators Figure 10, Figure 1 1, and Figure 12 show the LEDs, and eject button of the DDS-format tape drives. Figure 10 DDS-DC (Early Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 11 DDS-DC (Later Model) Drive Controls and Indicators Figure 12 DDS-2 Drive Controls and Indicators Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean DCLZ T ape LED Clean/Attention LED Eject Button T ape Clean
51 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions LEDs This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The two LEDs on the front panels of the DDS drives indicate different activ- ities or problems that occur . Figure 13 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS-DC early model drive. Figure 14 lists the LED codes and their meanings for the DDS- DC later model and DDS-2 drives. Figure 13 DDS-DC (Early Model) Tape Drive LED Display Codes OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber Key Cassette Drive Meaning Read/Write States Write-Protect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure)
52 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Figure 14 DDS-DC (Later Model) and DDS-2 Tape Drive LED Display Codes LED Warning Conditions The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warn- ing condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high. The drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-Test (Failure) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and con- tact your local service representative. Media Wear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of errors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to determine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green Pulsing Amber Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on 1/4 sec off Key Tape Clean/ Meaning Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Attention Fault Any Any 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off
53 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1 Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2 Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as described in âCleaning the T ape Heads,â later in this chapter . 3 Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Caution) signal dis- played. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced. 4 If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your ï¬les using a new data cassette. 5 If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, back up the ï¬les to a new data cassette, then discard the data cassette. Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently speciï¬ed to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This translates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consistently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multiple passes over sec- tions of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts fre- quently .
54 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Cleaning the Tape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1 Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cas- sette and cleans the heads. At the end of the cleaning cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2 W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times. Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other DDS-format tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data.
55 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write- protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cas- sette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 15. Figure 15 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a DDS Tape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 15. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette. Push tab right for write. Push tab left for write-pr otect .
56 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Operating the DDS Tape Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette from the DDS tape drive: 1 Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 16. Figure 16 Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 2 Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop ï¬ashing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 3 T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 16. The LEDs on the drive ï¬ash on and off. T en to twen- ty seconds later , the data cassette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cas- sette from the drive. Eject Button
57 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Verifying the DDS Tape Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the DDS-format tape drive, as root user , enter the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan -d stape After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the fol- lowing: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.3 target 8/16/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see your tape drive, it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
58 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device, and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your tape drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Periph- eral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Tape Drives -> . 4 The Tape Drives window opens. 5 In the list of tape drives, click on the desired tape drive to select it. 6 From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device ï¬les for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
59 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Archiving Data This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS-format data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command and your tape driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar command allows you to save ï¬les to a data cassette, restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system, or list the ï¬les on your data cassette. Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a data cassette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar -cvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression.
60 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a data cassette to your system: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory you want the ï¬les to reside in. 3 Enter the following command line to restore data: tar -xvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speciï¬ed, everything on the data cassette is restored. If the tape was made using data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as supporting compression. Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a data cassette: 1 Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line to receive a ï¬le listing of the data cassette: tar -tvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile where devicefile is one of the device ï¬les listed from sam. If the tape was made with data compression, use one of the device ï¬le names that sam listed as sup- porting compression.
61 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive Operating the DDS T ape Drive Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt, and fbackup commands. For more information on these commands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command
62 Using Y our Digital Data Storage (DDS) T ape Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A - Box of ï¬ve 60-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B - Box of ï¬ve 90-meter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A - Box of ï¬ve 120-meter DDS data cassettes (not supported on the DDS-DC drives) ⢠HP92283K - Package of two head-cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L - Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
63 4 Using Your 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive
64 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. The information is organized into the following sections: ⢠Using the floppy diskette ⢠Operating the floppy drive ⢠Troubleshooting ⢠Ordering information The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 9.05 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface. NOTICES: When examples of user input are given in this chapter, enter them at the command-line prompt in an HP VUE terminal window or HP-UX shell. Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator .
65 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Using the Floppy Diskette This section describes basic information needed for using your ï¬oppy dis- kettes. Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-pro- tect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Fig- ure 17. Figure 17 Setting the Write-Protect Tab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect ï¬les on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 17. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Push tab up for write. Push tab down for write-pr otect
66 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Using the Floppy Diskette Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the ï¬oppy disk drive: 1 Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 18. Figure 18 Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2 Push the diskette into the ï¬oppy drive until it clicks into place. 3 T o remove the diskette, push the eject button (Figure 18), then take out the dis- kette. Eject Button
67 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Operating the Floppy Drive This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive. Verifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the ï¬oppy drive, use the ioscan command to see which devices are currently in use on your sys- tem. 1 Enter the following at a command prompt: /sbin/ioscan After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the I/O devices it could ï¬nd. If there is a ï¬oppy drive in the list, that listing appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description =========== ============ =================== 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 graphics Graphics 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive
68 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Using Device Files Device ï¬les are special ï¬les that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a speciï¬c device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device ï¬les are available for use with your ï¬oppy drive, use the following procedure: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following command: sam RETURN 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems->. 3 The Disks and File Systems window opens. 4 In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5 From the Actions menu, click on View More Information A window opens with a list of information for the ï¬oppy drive, including the device ï¬les.
69 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new ï¬oppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new ï¬oppy diskette follow these steps: 1 Log in as root . 2 Make sure that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 17. 3 Insert the diskette into the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4 In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit -i 2 devicefile where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam.
70 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Transferring Data To and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your ï¬oppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your ï¬oppy driveâ s device ï¬le. The tar (tape ï¬le archiver) command saves ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette, restores ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette, or lists ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the ï¬les on a diskette. Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save ï¬les to a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Check that the write-protect tab on the ï¬oppy diskette is in the write position. 2 Load the formatted ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 3 In a terminal window, enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar -cvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to write to the diskette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Your System Use the following instructions to restore ï¬les from a ï¬oppy diskette to your system: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window, use the cd command to change to the directory you want the files to reside in: cd directory_path where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory .
71 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive 3 Enter the following command line: tar -xvf devicefile pathname where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the ï¬le or directory containing ï¬les that you want to restore from the diskette. If you donât specify pathname, everything on the ï¬oppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the ï¬les on a ï¬oppy diskette: 1 Load the ï¬oppy diskette into the disk drive. 2 In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar -tvf deviceï¬le where deviceï¬le is the device ï¬le as listed by sam. All ï¬les on the ï¬oppy diskette are listed.
72 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the command argu- ments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal win- dow: man tar The man utility looks up man pages on the system. Y ou can mount the ï¬oppy drive as a ï¬le system using the SAM utility . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a ï¬le system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the ï¬oppy drive, see the man- ual Using HP-UX (B2910-90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your ï¬oppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man cpio For more information on copying to or from DOS ï¬les, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp For more information on listing the contents of DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls For more information on using your ï¬oppy disk drive and ï¬oppy diskettes, refer to the ï¬oppy man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man floppy For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the medi- ainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit
73 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Operating the Floppy Drive Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your work- station, you need to reconï¬gure the HP-UX Kernel to add the ï¬oppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the ï¬exible disk driver and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconï¬gure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355-90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910-90001)
74 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive T roubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your ï¬oppy disk drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro ï¬exible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch ï¬oppy disk drive, use the following order number: HP-92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) - box of ten diskettes
75 5 Solving Problems
76 Solving Problems This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for service, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . This chapter is divided into the following sections: ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Interpreting LED error codes ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Running system veriï¬cation tests The instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX version 10.2 or later operating system with HP VUE version 3.0 or later interface.
77 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Common Problems and Solutions The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the prob- lems. Problems with Powering Up the System T able 7 describes possible problems you may encounter when powering up the system and offers possible solutions. T able 7 Power Up Problems Problem Solution The power LED does not light. Make sure all AC power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working AC outlet. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or ï¬ickers. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appen- dix B for information about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor conï¬guration. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
78 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System T able 8 describes possible problems you may encounter when loading and booting the operating system and offers solutions. T able 8 Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two minutes have passed with no sign of system activ- ity . Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination). The system stops or hangs while booting. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
79 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems with the 802.3 Network T able 9 describes possible problems you may encounter with the 802.3 net- work and offers solutions. T able 9 Problems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Cannot reach other sys- tems on the network. Applications that rely on the network will not run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . Network Auto-Negotia- tion fails. Systems can- not connect or establish link. (Models 132L /B180) The following can cause Auto-Negotiation failure: ⢠Non-Category 5 cabling. Cabling must be installed by certified installers. ⢠Improper cable termination. ⢠Maximum cable lengths exceeded. ⢠Incompatibility/Interoperability problems between LAN devices. Check the cabling and interfaces for proper installation and operation. If you know the speed/duplex settings for the connection device, you can also manually set the worksta- tion LAN interface setting using the Boot Console Iterface, see âConï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only)â on page 222. When the workstation fails to establish a link using the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector , the workstation automatically switches from the LAN-TP(RJ45) connector to the AUI connector . Y ou can manually set the LAN interface to the AUI connector using the Boot Console Interface, see âCon- ï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only)â on page 222. If problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
80 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive T able 10 describes possible problems you may encounter using the hard disk drive and offers solutions. T able 10 Pr oblems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. Make sure that all the SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are correctly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failureâ in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
81 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive T able 11 describes a possible problem you may encounter when you use the CD-ROM drive and offers a solution. T able 1 1 Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . V erify that the CD is mounted. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section âRunning the System V eriï¬cation T estsâ in this chapter to verify that the CD- ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative
82 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the DDS Tape Drive T able 12 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the DDS tape drive and offers solutions. T able 12 Pr oblems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to com- mands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le name for commands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are try- ing to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can communicate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section "Running the System V eriï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
83 Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive T able 13 describes a possible problem you may encounter using the ï¬oppy disk drive and offers a solution. T able 13 Pr oblems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The ï¬oppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you speciï¬ed the correct device ï¬le for com- mands that require a device ï¬le name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a ï¬oppy diskette. Use a new ï¬oppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section "Running the System V eriï¬cation T ests" in this chapter to verify that the ï¬oppy drive is functioning properly . If the problem persists, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
84 Solving Problems LED Error Codes LED Error Codes This section contains information about the error codes displayed by the LEDs on the systemâ s front panel. If an error occurs during the power-up diagnostics tests, the diagnostics use the front panel LEDs to display a code for the failing component. Figure 19 shows the location of the system unitâ s front panel LEDs. The four amber LEDs indicate system status and error codes. T able 14 shows the LED error codes as they appear on the front panel LEDs. Use these LED codes to determine the failing component. Figure 19 System Unit Front Panel LEDs
85 Solving Problems LED Error Codes T able 14 LED Err or Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description N/A Reserved 7401 No memory found F AUL T Likely cause: SIMMs or pr ocessor boar d N/A Reserved FL T 7000-7F00 Memory Error Fault Likely Cause: Memory SIMMs System console will indicate which SIMM fault occurr ed on FL T 1030-4099 Processor board F AUL T (includes PDH which could be on I/O board.) FL T 5000 - 500F FL T 8000 - 8FFF* FL T CD00 - CDFF I/O System F AUL T *Except backplane faults listed below FL T 8500, 8501 FL T 8C00-8CFF Backplane F AUL T (includes PCI) Any INIT/TEST code INITIALIZA TION and TESTING Note: These two LED codes will alternate to indicate forwar d pr ogr ess: 01 1 1, 1000, 01 1 1,... Any fault not in this table including FL T 1000-101C Unknown F AUL T FL T CBF0 - CBFF FL T 1001 HPMC F AUL T
86 Solving Problems LED Error Codes FL T A088 - A0FF No console/IPL error F AUL T N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Reserved N/A Power on value. Indicates processor board fault when this value remains for more than a second following power up. T able 14 LED Err or Codes LED V alue RS-232 Chassis Code Range Description
87 Solving Problems Dealing with a Boot Failure Dealing with a Boot Failure If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1 Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2 At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation. 3 Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in mnemonic style notation, such as sescsi.6.0 4 If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the ï¬le system or with the hardware. If you suspect a ï¬le system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with ï¬le system failures. If you think that some- thing is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more trouble- shooting information.
88 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests Running System Verification Tests HP-UX uses an on-line diagnostics product called the Support T ools Man- ager that allows system operation veriï¬cations. Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven inter- face (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the on-line man pages by entering the following at the command line prompt: man cstm man mstm man xstm T o access the Support T ools Manager, perform the following steps:
89 Solving Problems Running System V eriï¬cation T ests 1 At a command line prompt, enter the following: cstm The following message appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> 2 At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 3 T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 4 Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported. 5 T o exit the Support T ools Manager , enter the following: CSTM> exit If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualiï¬ed service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
90 Solving Problems Device V eriï¬cation Device Verification The ioscan command scans the system and lists the devices that it can ï¬nd. The following command line reports the device ï¬les for the devices it ï¬nds: /usr/sbin/ioscan -fun Enter the following command for more information on the ioscan command: man ioscan The insf command installs device special ï¬les for devices that it ï¬nds con- nected to the system. Enter the following command line to run the insf com- mand: /usr/sbin/insf Enter the following command for more information on the insf command: man insf
91 A Safety and Regulatory Statements
92 Safety and Regulatory Statements This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your B132L/ B132L / B160L/B180L workstation. It provides information on the following topics: ⢠Declaration of conformity ⢠Special video configuration statements ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Safety statements ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠Warnings and cautions
93 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 1 Declaration of Conformity 1
94 Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity 2 Declaration of Conformity 2
95 Safety and Regulatory Statements Special Video Conï¬guration Statements Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
96 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Emissions Regulations Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Cana- dian Department of Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa- tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guaran- tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip- ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certiï¬cation tests were conducted with HP-sup- ported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modiï¬cations not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to comply with the re- quirements of the FCC.
97 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations VCCI Class 2 ITE
98 Safety and Regulatory Statements Emissions Regulations Compliance Emissions Regulations Compliance Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations state- ments. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom.
99 Safety and Regulatory Statements Acoustics Acoustics Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa<70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19
100 Safety and Regulatory Statements Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following pre- cautions during board unpacking, installation, and conï¬guration: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dis- charged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their protective antistatic bags.
101 Safety and Regulatory Statements Safety Statement Safety Statement This equipment conforms to the following safety standards: ⢠UL 1950 ⢠CSA 950 ⢠IEC 950 ⢠EN 60950
102 Safety and Regulatory Statements Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A. Only) The CD ROM mass-storage system is certiï¬ed as a Class-1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radia- tion Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass-storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass-storage system is com- pletely conï¬ned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Visible LEDs The visible LED on this product is classiï¬ed as â Class 1 LED PRODUCTâ in accordance with EN 60825-1.
103 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions
104 Safety and Regulatory Statements W arnings and Cautions
105 B Changing Your Workstationâs Hardware Configuration
106 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hard- ware conï¬guration. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing your workstation ⢠Removing the main tray assembly ⢠Replacing the main tray assembly ⢠Installing storage devices ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing cache boards ⢠Installing an EISA, GSC, or PCI option board ⢠Installing an optional System Graphics RAM (EGRAM) board ⢠Changing your monitor type CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconï¬guring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your conï¬guration: ⢠Light-duty flat blade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 in.) blade ⢠Needlenose pliers ⢠Torx screwdriver Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
107 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs Checking the SCSI IDs T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 Click on the Terminal Control on the Front Panel of your Workspace. A terminal window opens. 2 Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single-click the left mouse button. 3 Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f
108 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Checking the SCSI IDs After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================== bc 8 bc Pseudo Bus Converter 8/0 unknown Processor 8/12 ext_bus GSC Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk HP C3325W 8/12.7 target 8/12.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/0 ext_bus Built-in Parallel Interface 8/16/1 audio Built-in Audio 8/16/4 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk Quantum VP32210 8/16/5.7 target 8/16/5.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16/6 lan Built-in LAN 8/16/7 ps2 Built-in Keyboard/Mouse 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive 8/16/10.2 floppy HP_PC_FDC_FLOPPY 8/20 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/20/2 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/20/5 ba EISA Bus Adapter 8/24 graphics Graphics 62 processor Processor 63 memory Memory 4 You can find out the SCSI IDs currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading. For example, the SCSI disk above is listed at address 8/16/5.6.0 which indicates a SCSI address 6. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any SCSI device. Address 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
109 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Preparing Your Workstation This section describes how to prepare your workstation for changing its con- ï¬guration. Use the following procedure to prepare your workstation: 1 Shut down your workstation by typing the shutdown -h command as root user. NOTE: When you press the power button, the workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it powers off the system. However, this is not the recommended method for shutting down your system. 2 When the workstation has completed shutting down, turn off the system unit, turn off the monitor, and any peripheral devices connected to the workstation. 3 Unplug the power cord of the system unit, the monitor, and any peripheral devic- es from ac wall outlets. 4 Unplug the power cord from the back of the system unit. 5 Remove the floor stand from the system unit (if used), as shown in Figure 20.
11 0 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Preparing Y our Workstation Figure 20 Removing the Floor Stand 6 Lay the system unit on a flat surface, such as a table top. 7 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back of the system unit.
111 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing the Main T ray Assembly Removing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the Main T ray Assembly: 1 Shutdown and prepare the workstation as described in Preparing Your Worksta- tion earlier in this appendix. 2 Disconnect all cables and connectors from the front and rear connectors of the system unit. 3 Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 4 Remove the four thumbscrews on the rear of the system unit, as shown in Figure 21. Figure 21 Removing Main Tray Assembly 5 Place one hand on the top of the system unit and push, while pulling the handle on the rear panel with your other hand. See Figure 21. 6 Slide the main tray assembly out of the chassis. Thumbscrews Thumbscrews
11 2 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly Replacing the Main Tray Assembly Perform the following steps to replace the main tray assembly: 1 Align the main tray assembly with the chassis, aligning the tray with the ridges on the bottom of the case, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 22. Figure 22 Replacing the Main Tray Assembly 2 Slide the main tray in until it is fully seated in the chassis. 3 Tighten the four thumbscrews, as shown in Figure 22. NOTICE: T o maintain regulatory agency compliance, verify that the main tray is fully seated and all four thumb screws are completely tightened. Thumbscrews Thumbscrews
11 3 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Main T ray Assembly 4 Reconnect the power cables and any other cables or terminators that you disconnected when opening the workstation. 5 Power on the monitor , any peripheral devices, and the system unit. If you installed a new hard disk drive, go to Conï¬guring a Hard Disk Drive on page 135. If you installed a new removable media device, refer to the following chap- ters for information on using the device: ⢠Chapter 2 - Using Your CD-ROM Drive ⢠Chapter 3 - Using Your Digital Data Storage (DDS) Tape Drive ⢠Chapter 4 - Using Your 3.5-inch Floppy Drive
11 4 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing Storage Devices This section describes how to install storage devices in your workstation. Before installing a new storage device, perform the following procedures as described earlier in this appendix: ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Preparing Your Workstation ⢠Removing the Main Tray Assembly CAUTION: All storage devices are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the devices, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the storage device kit. Always handle the drive carefully . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of your storage devicesâ SCSI addresses. The host SCSI controllers use SCSI ID 7.
11 5 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Preparing to Install Your Storage Device This section describes information that you need to consider and procedures that you need to perform before installing any storage device. Configuring your Storage Device T able 15 lists the recommended SCSI IDs for internal storage devices. If an existing device already uses one of the suggested IDs, select an alternate ID. NOTICE: The ï¬oppy disk drive is not a SCSI device. Set the jumpers and SCSI IDs according to the installation instructions that came with your device. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI can use addresses in the range 0 through 7, with 7 reserved for the controller . Fast, W ide Differential and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI can use addresses in the range 0 through 15, with 7 reserved for the controller . Determining Your Storage Devices Position Each storage device is restricted as to where in the storage tray it may be installed. Before installing a storage device, use Figure 23 and T able 16 to determine which disk tray position is correct for your device. T able 15 Default SCSI IDs Fast, Wide SCSI and Ultra W ide SCSI 1st Hard Disk Drive ID 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive ID 5 Note: The Fast, W ide SCSI and Ultra W ide controller is set to SCSI ID 7. Single-Ended SCSI CD-ROM Drive ID 2 DDS Drive ID 3 1st Hard Disk Drive ID 6 2nd Hard Disk Drive ID 5 Notes: The ï¬oppy drive is NOT a SCSI device. Each SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7.
11 6 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Figure 23 shows the storage device positions in the disk tray . T able 16 lists what devices are supported in the different disk tray positions. The numbers in the tableâ s left column refer to the position numbers in Figure 23. Figure 23 Disk Tray Positions (Side View) T able 16 Storage Conï¬gurations Disk T ray Position Supported Devices Conditions 3 Floppy Drive The ï¬oppy drive is not a SCSI device. 2 CD-ROM DDS-T ape Single-Ended SCSI Disk Fast W ide SCSI Disk * Ultra W ide SCSI Disk The CD-ROM drive and the DDS tape drive are single- ended SCSI devices. 1 Single-Ended SCSI Disk Fast W ide SCSI Disk * Ultra W ide SCSI Disk * Fast W ide SCSI devices are supported only with the optional Fast W ide SCSI controller . 1 2 3 Front
11 7 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Removing the Storage Tray Before removing the Storage T ray Assembly , perform the procedures described in Preparing to Install Y our Storage Device on page 1 15. NOTICE: The Storage T ray Assembly does not have to be removed from the system unit to access a hard disk drive or the 3.5-inch ï¬oppy drive. If you are installing a hard disk or ï¬oppy drive, proceed directly to Removing the Storage T ray Cover on page 120 . Perform the following steps to remove the storage tray assembly from the Main T ray: 1 Pull the tab and slide the memory retainer toward the front of the main tray to re- move it, as shown in Figure 24. Figure 24 Removing the Memory Retainer
11 8 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Disconnect the power, SCSI and CD Audio cables from the system board and the backplane, as shown in Figure 25. When disconnecting the ï¬oppy cable use the following procedure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. 3 Remove SCSI terminators from rear panel SCSI connectors (if necessary). 4 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 25. Figure 25 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI Retaining Screw Locking Ring Rear Panel SCSI Connectors
11 9 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 Hold the storage tray with both hands and slide it toward the front of the main tray approximately an inch, then lift it straight up to remove it. Figure 26 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly
120 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Removing the Storage Tray Cover T o remove the storage tray cover press in the two cover locking tabs then lift the front end of the cover and slide it forward off of the pins in the rear , as shown in Figure 27. Figure 27 Removing the Storage Tray Cover Proceed to one of the following subsections to install your storage device in the disk tray: ⢠Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive ⢠Installing a Floppy Drive ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) ⢠Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position)
121 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a CD-ROM or a DDS-Format Tape Drive Perform the following procedure to install a CD-ROM or DDS tape drive in the disk tray: 1 Remove the disk filler panel from the bottom location of the storage tray bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt, object to pry it from the front., as shown in Figure 28. Figure 28 Removing a Disk Filler Panel
122 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 From the front of the storage tray, line up the slides on the CD-ROM or DDS tape drive with the slots in the storage tray, and slide it into place, as shown in Figure 29. Figure 29 Installing a CD-ROM or DDS Tape 3 Push the CD-ROM or tape drive in about half way. 4 Connect the single-ended SCSI data cable and the power cable to the drive. 5 Push the drive in all of the way until you hear and feel the slides snap into place 6 Connect the CD-ROM audio cable to the CD-ROM drive. 7 Feed the CD-ROM audio cable out of the storage tray opening. 8 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
123 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Floppy Drive Perform the following procedure to install a ï¬oppy drive in the disk tray: 1 Remove the floppy filler panel from the top location of the bezel by using a coin or other flat, blunt, object to pry it from the front, as shown in Figure 30. Figure 30 Removing the Floppy Filler Panel
124 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Set the floppy drive in the floppy support tray. Be sure to line up the alignment pin in the tray with the hole in the floppy drive, as shown in Figure 31. Figure 31 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
125 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 3 Connect the floppy data cable to the floppy drive and the system board as shown in, Figure 32. When connecting the ï¬oppy data cable, use the following procedure, as shown in Figure 32: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 32 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 4 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
126 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive: 1 Disconnect the cable from the floppy disk drive, as shown in Figure 33. a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. Figure 33 Disconnecting the Floppy Drive Cable
127 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 2 Lift the rear of the floppy disk carrier, push the carrier toward the rear of the disk tray, then lift the front of the floppy disk carrier from the Storage Tray, as shown in Figure 34. Figure 34 Removing the Floppy Disk Drive Assembly
128 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 3 Align the four feet on the bottom of the disk drive carrier with the square holes in the storage tray, as shown in Figure 35. Figure 35 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 2 (Front Position) 4 Set the drive in the storage tray. 5 Connect the power connector and the appropriate SCSI connector to the drive. 6 Push the drive toward the rear of the tray until the locking tab on the drive carrier snaps into place, as shown in Figure 35.
129 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 7 Replace the ï¬oppy and its carrier by setting the mounting pins near the front of the storage tray in place ï¬rst, then push the carrier toward the front of the storage tray slightly and set the rear mounting pins in place. Figure 36 Replacing the Floppy Drive and Carrier 8 Push down ï¬rmly on the rear of the ï¬oppy carrier to ensure that it is fully locked in place.
130 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 9 Connect the cable to the floppy drive. When connecting the ï¬oppy data cable, use the following procedure, as shown in Figure 37: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector until the blue line is even with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 37 Connecting the Floppy Drive Data Cable 10 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
131 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) Perform the following procedure to install a hard disk drive in position 1: 1 Align the four feet on the bottom of the drive carrier with the square holes in the storage tray, as shown in Figure 38. Figure 38 Installing a Hard Disk Drive in Position 1 (Rear Position) 2 Set the drive in the storage tray. 3 Connect the power connector and the appropriate SCSI connector to the drive. 4 Push the drive toward the rear of the tray until the locking tab on the drive carrier snaps into place, as shown in Figure 38. 5 Proceed to the section entitled Replacing the Storage Tray Cover on page 132.
132 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray Cover Perform the following procedure to replace the storage tray cover , as shown in Figure 39: 1 Slide the cutouts on the rear of the cover onto the pins on the storage tray . 2 Swing the cover into place. 3 Press down on the front edge of the cover to make sure that the locking tabs on the storage tray fully engage the cover . Figure 39 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 4 If you removed the storage tray, continue with the next section Replacing the Storage Tray on page 133 . If you did not remove the storage tray , follow the instructions in Replacing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 12.
133 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Replacing the Storage Tray When replacing the storage tray , use the following procedure: 1 Align the pins on the back panel of the main tray with the holes on the rear of the storage tray and slide the storage tray onto the pins, as shown in Figure 40. Figure 40 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 2 Lower the front of the storage and move it slightly forward to align the pins on its side with the slots on the main tray, as shown in Figure 40. 3 Slide the storage tray towards the rear of the main tray until the pins are fully seat- ed in the main tray slots, as shown in Figure 40. 4 Replace and tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 40. Retaining Screw
134 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 5 Reconnect the floppy, SE SCSI, power, CD-ROM audio, and FW SCSI cables as shown in Figure 41. Reconnect rear-panel SCSI connector terminators, if neces- sary. When connecting the ï¬oppy cable to the system board, use the following proce- dure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector until the blue line is even with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 41 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
135 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices Configuring a Hard Disk Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a ï¬le system using SAM. If you installed a new hard disk drive, follow these instructions to make your new disk usable as a ï¬le system. For more infor- mation about conï¬guring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual. This procedure requires you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as r oot , contact your system administrator . 1 In a terminal window , enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/sam 2 The System Administration Manager window opens. Double-click on Peripheral Devices -> . 3 The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems -> . 4 The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens, containing a list of drives currently conï¬gured on this system. 5 From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive . 6 The Select a Disk to Add window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your system. 7 Click on OK .
136 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Storage Devices 8 The Set Disk Usage and Options window opens. Select File System and click on OK . 9 The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on OK.
137 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Installing Additional memory Before installing memory modules, perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. When you have completed changing your workstationâ s memory conï¬gura- tion perform the procedure described in Replacing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 12. T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory . ⢠Before you attempt to install additional memory modules in your B132L/ B132L /B160L/B180L workstation, use the information described in Appendix D, âBoot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory conï¬guration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory modules before you begin. ⢠You must insert memory modules in pairs of equal size. ⢠Modules should be inserted in the lowest numbered memory pair first then in nu- merical order. For example, install memory in 0A and 0B first, then 1A and 1B, and 2A and 2B. You must also install the largest memory modules first. For ex- ample, install 64 Mbyte module pairs, then 32 Mbyte module pairs, then 16 Mbyte module pairs, and so on. Note that the B180L supports the use of 128 Mbyte modules. Refer to Figure 42 for memory pair numbering and location. ⢠When you have finished installing additional memory modules, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the workstation. Y ou may need to remove existing memory modules and move them to a dif- ferent location when changing your workstationâ s memory conï¬guration. Use the following procedure to remove memory modules. Use the procedure in the subsection entitled Installing Memory Modules on page 141 to install memory modules.
138 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Removing Memory Modules Perform the following steps to remove memory modules: 1 Locate the memory modules on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 Memory Module Location Memory Module Connectors 0B 0A 1B 1A 2B 2A White Ejector Tabs
139 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 43 Figure 43 Removing the Memory Retainer
140 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 3 To remove a memory module, push the ejector tabs on each side of the module. Lift the memory module up and out of the connector and place it on a static-free surface. Figure 44 shows how to remove a memory module. Figure 44 Removing a Memory Module
141 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory Installing Memory Modules Perform the following steps to install memory modules: 1 Locate the memory connectors on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 45. Figure 45 Memory Module Location Memory Module Connectors 0B 0A 1B 1A 2B 2A White Ejector Tabs
142 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 46. Figure 46 Removing the Memory Retainer
143 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Additional memory 3 Close the ejector tabs on each side of the memory connector to lessen the force required to seat the memory module, as shown in Figure 47. 4 Line up the memory module with the guides making sure that the notched end of the memory module is toward the white ejector tab (front of the main tray), as shown in Figure 47. Figure 47 Installing Memory Modules 5 Press firmly and evenly on the memory module to ensure that it is fully seated. 6 Install the memory retainer. 7 To verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on displaying memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty memory module, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >.â White Ejector Tab
144 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing Cache Boards Removing Cache Boards Follow these steps to remove the cache boards from the workstation. 1 Locate the cache boards on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 48. Figure 48 Cache Boards Location 2 To remove a cache board, push the ejector tabs on each side of the board. Lift the cache board up and out of the connector and place it on a static free sur- face. Cache Board Connectors
145 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Removing Cache Boards Figure 49 Removing a Cache Board
146 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Second Level Cache Boards Installing Second Level Cache Boards Before installing second level cache boards, perform the procedure in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. Follow these steps to install second level cache boards into your worksta- tion. 1 Locate the cache board connectors on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 50. Figure 50 Cache Boards Location Cache Board Connectors
147 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing Second Level Cache Boards 2 Open the ejector tabs on each side of the cache connector and line the cache board up with the guides making sure that the keying notches along the connector edge of the board are away from the memory modules, as shown in Figure 51. Figure 51 Installing Cache Boards NOTICE: Y ou must install cache boards in pairs of equal size. 3 Press firmly and evenly on the cache board to ensure that it is fully seated. The ejector tabs will close and engage the notches on the sides of the cache board as you push down. 4 Perform the procedure in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112. Keying Notches
148 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Y our workstation includes two option slots. Option slot 1 supports either PCI or GSC option boards. Option slot 2 supports either PCI, EISA, or GSC option boards. Figure 52 shows the physical layout of the option slots. Figure 52 Option Slots from Outside the System Unit Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2
149 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Graphics Adapter Considerations If you are installing a graphics option, read the information in this section ï¬rst. Special Video Configuration Statements The following statements apply only to those applications which include a cable connected to the S-V ideo connector on the A4248A card. No modiï¬- cation to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected to other connectors on the card but not to the S- V ideo connector . For EN55022 or CISPR 22 Applications: W ARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. For FCC Applications: NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
150 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Graphics Paths graphics(0) is the built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1) and graphics(2) are graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 and 2. When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics (NB), where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. A and B denote the two video output connectors on the dual display adapter . For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 2 would be graphics(2A) and graphics(2B). Graphics Configuration Restrictions The system supports only four graphics displays at a time. A âdisplayâ is a video output port or connector . For example, the Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) is a dual display card. It has two external video connectors so it accounts for two of the maximum of four displays. Install- ing two of these cards accounts for four displays, which is the maximum supported by the system. The built-in graphics adapter accounts for one graphics display ( graphics(0)). If four displays are installed in the option slots, the built-in graphics adapter is automatically disabled. NOTICE: The A4077A Color Graphics Card, A4078A Dual Color Graphics Card, A4079B HCRX-8Z graphics adapter , and the A4071B HCRX-24 graphics adapter with the A4072A Z Accelerator attached are not supported in the B Class workstations.
151 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board Installing the Option Board Before installing option boards you must perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assembly on page 1 1 1. Follow these steps to install a PCI, EISA, or GSC option board into your workstation: 1 Push in the locking tab and slide the option board support bracket toward the rear of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 53. 2 Remove the blank plate retaining screw, then remove the blank plate, as shown in Figure 53. Figure 53 Removing the Option Board Support Bracket and Blank Plate Blank Plate Support Bracket
152 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 3 Slide the board into the slot, as shown in Figure 54. 4 Press in firmly on both ends of the option board at the same time to make sure that it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. 5 Use the blank plate retaining screw to secure the option board, as shown in Figure 54. Figure 54 Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board
153 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 6 If you are installing an EISA or GSC option board, you must use a ballpoint pen tip, or other blunt instrument, to remove the PCI adapter from the correct slot po- sition on the option board support bracket, as shown in Figure 55. Figure 55 Removing the PCI Adapter
154 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing a PCI, EISA, or GSC Option Board 7 Place the option board support bracket over the edge of the option board and slide it into the slot on the power supply until the locking tab snaps into place, as shown in Figure 56. Figure 56 Replacing the Option Board Support Bracket 8 Replace the main tray assembly as described in Replacing the Main Tray Assem- bly on page 112.
155 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery Replacing the Battery 1 Remove the main tray as described in Removing the Main Tray Assembly on page 111. 2 Pull the tab on the memory retainer and slide it toward the front of the main tray to remove it, as shown in Figure 57 Figure 57 Removing the Memory Retainer
156 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 3 Disconnect the cables from the system board and the optional fast, wide SCSI adapter, as shown in Figure 58. When disconnecting the ï¬oppy cable use the following procedure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, pull the cable out of the connector. 4 Remove the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 58. Figure 58 Disconnecting the Storage Tray Assembly Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
157 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 5 Hold the storage tray with both hands and slide it toward the front of the main tray approximately an inch, then lift it straight up to remove it. Figure 59 Removing the Storage Tray Assembly
158 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 6 Lift the clip and slip the battery out of its holder, as shown in Figure 60. NOTICE: Note the orientation of the battery. Make sure that you put the new battery in place with the positive ( ) side facing up. Figure 60 Removing the Battery 7 Insert the new battery in the holder with the positive ( ) side facing up. (Only use HP part number 1420-0314 or equivalent.) CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . A TTENTION: Il y a danger dâexplosion sâil y a replacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou dâun type recommandé par le constructeur . Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
159 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 8 Align the pins on the back panel of the main tray with the holes on the rear of the storage tray and slide the storage tray onto the pins, as shown in Figure 61. Figure 61 Installing the Storage Tray Assembly 9 Lower the front of the storage tray and move it slightly forward or backward to align the pins on its sides with the slots on the main tray, as shown in Figure 61. 10 Slide the storage tray towards the rear of the main tray until the pins are fully seat- ed in the main tray slots, as shown in Figure 61. 11 Replace and tighten the storage tray retaining screw, as shown in Figure 61.
160 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Replacing the Battery 12 Reconnect the floppy, SE SCSI, power, CD-ROM audio, and FW SCSI cables as shown in Figure 62. When connecting the ï¬oppy cable to the system board, use the following proce- dure: a Lift the locking ring on the connector to the up, or unlocked, position. b While holding the locking ring in the unlocked position, insert the cable into the connector with the locking ring. c Press down on the locking ring evenly on both ends until it snaps into the down, or locked, position. Figure 62 Connecting the Storage Tray Cables 13 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112. Floppy Connector SESCSI Storage Tray CD Audio Power FWSCSI
161 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module Before you can install the EGRAM module you must perform the following procedures: ⢠Removing the Main Tray Assembly on page 111 ⢠Removing the Storage Tray on page 117 Perform the following procedure to install the EGRAM module: 1 Install the standoffs into the four holes on the CPU board, as shown in Figure 63. Figure 63 Installing the Optional EGRAM Module
162 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional EGRAM (Enhanced Graphics RAM) Module 2 Line up the connector on the EGRAM module and the connector on the CPU board while at the same time aligning the standoffs to the holes in the EGRAM module, as shown in Figure 63. 3 Connect the EGRAM board to the CPU board. Press down firmly on the connec- tor area and near the standoffs to make sure that the module is fully seated and that the standoffs are fully engaged with the EGRAM module. 4 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Storage Tray on page 133 5 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112
163 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller Before you can install the FWD SCSI controller (B132L/B160L only) you must perform the procedure described in Removing the Main T ray Assem- bly on page 1 1 1. NOTE: Y ou cannot use both the Ultra, W ide-SE SCSI and the Fast Wide Dif ferential SCSI option at the same time. Perform the following procedure to install the FWD SCSI controller: 1 Install the three standoffs, as shown in Figure 64. 2 Line up the connector on the FW SCSI controller and the connector on the CPU board while at the same time aligning the standoffs to the holes in the FWD SCSI controller, as shown in Figure 64. Figure 64 Installing the Optional FWD SCSI Controller
164 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 3 Connect the FWD SCSI controller to the CPU board by pressing firmly on the connector area and near the standoffs to make sure that the FWD SCSI controller is fully seated and that the standoffs are fully engaged with the FWD SCSI con- troller. 4 Remove the storage tray cover by pressing in the two cover locking tabs then lift- ing the front end of the cover and sliding it forward off of the pins in the rear , as shown in Figure 65. Figure 65 Removing the Storage Tray Cover
165 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 5 Remove the two screws and remove the blank plate from the rear panel, as shown in Figure 66. Figure 66 Removing the Blank Plate Blank Plate
166 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 6 Connect the end of FWD SCSI cable to the FWD SCSI controller making sure that the red line on the cable is toward the rear (away from the fans) of the main tray, as shown in Figure 67. Figure 67 Installing the FWD SCSI Cable 7 Set the ferrite bead into the slot on the side of the storage tray. Make sure that the cable is dressed so that it will not be damaged by the storage tray cover 8 Use the two hex standoffs to install the external connector on the end of the FWD SCSI cable into the rear panel of the storage tray, as shown in Figure 67. 9 Secure the cable in the cable clip so that it does not interfere with the disk drives, as shown in Figure 67. Ferrite Bead Cable Clip To FWD SCSI Controller Red Line External Connector
167 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Installing the Optional Fast Wide Differential SCSI Controller 10 Slide the cutouts on the rear of the storage tray cover onto the pins on the storage tray and swing the cover into place, as shown in Figure 68. 11 Press down on the front edge of the cover to make sure that the locking tabs on the storage tray fully engage the cover . Figure 68 Replacing the Storage Tray Cover 12 If you are not connecting any external devices to the external FWD SCSI connec- tor you must connect the FWD SCSI terminator. 13 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Main Tray Assembly on page 112
168 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype Changing Your Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a different type, you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support it. There are two ways to reconï¬gure your workstation to support a different monitor type: Setting the Monitor Type from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters before you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: W ait 2 seconds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab (only press T ab once) to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. The system cycles through the supported monitor types. Until the system tries a monitor type that is compatible with your monitor , the display is unreadable. When you are able to read the information displayed, press the Enter key to stop the system from trying other monitor types. The system displays infor- mation similar to the following: MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz This is type 12 of 15 types. Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type:
169 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype The system queries you to save the new monitor type. If the monitor type displayed is correct, press Y to save this monitor type. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz This is type 12 of 15 types. Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type: Press [y] to save this monitor type: If this is not the correct monitor type, press any other key to continue the search. Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the following procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
170 Changing Y our Workstationâ s Hardware Conï¬guration Changing Y our Monitor T ype
171 C SCSI Connections
172 SCSI Connections This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer Sys- tem Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 B132L/ B132L / B160L/180L workstation. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports NOTICES When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. If no external devices are connected to the external SCSI connectors on the rear panel of the workstation, a SCSI terminator must be installed.
173 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences SCSI Bus Differences A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external SCSI devices running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are 4-mm DDS-format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W inches- ter hard disk drives. There are three types of SCSI buses available with this workstation - a nar- row single-ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) bus, and a fast, wide differential SCSI (FWD SCSI) bus or an ultra, wide, single-ended SCSI bus. T able 17 shows the speciï¬cation differences between these SCSI buses, and T able 18 shows the SCSI addresses, ID numbers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix single-ended, fast, wide and ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. T able 17 SCSI Bus Differ ences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Optional Single-Ended 8 bits 8 6.0 meters (19.6 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 5 Mbytes per second Fast, Wide 16 bits 16 25 meters (82 feet) Internal and external Optional Up to 20 Mbytes per second Ultra, Wide-SE 16 bits 16** 2.0 meters (6.56 feet) Internal and external Embedded Up to 40 Mbytes per second * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on both buses. ** Only 2 external devices allowed (total of 4 devices).
174 SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences T able 18 SCSI Bus Addr esses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SE SCSI Address SCSI ID Number Priority 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8-bit Devices Single-Ended SCSI Bus 16-bit Devices Fast, W ide SCSI Bus
175 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions SCSI Restrictions This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and Terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Narrow Single-Ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Fast, W ide Differential SCSI devices: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for externally connected Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI devices: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length
176 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP devices. Use of other cables can result in signiï¬cant problems with system operation. The NSE SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of NSE SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). The FWD SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of FWD SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). The ultra, wide-SE SCSI deï¬nition limits the total cable length of ultra, wide-SE SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your conï¬guration. If you are daisy-chaining NSE SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining FWD SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2911A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wide-SE SCSI devices together , use the fol- lowing cables: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠C2979A cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length NOTICE See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
177 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions Connectors and Terminators Any NSE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 50-pin high-den- sity thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the systems external connector . Any FWD SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high- density thumb screw connector on both ends. Any ultra, wide-SE SCSI device connecting to the system must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw connector on both ends . NOTICE: If no external devices are connected to any SCSI connector on the back panel, a SCSI terminator must be installed. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order a C2905A, 68-pin terminator for the FWD SCSI bus, a C2904A, 50-pin high density terminator for the NSE SCSI bus or a C2972A, 68-pin terminator for the ultra, wide-SE SCSI bus from Hewlett-Packard. SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to the number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the addi- tional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own conï¬guration constraints: ⢠NSE SCSI bus ⢠Optional FWD SCSI bus ⢠Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Narrow-SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the narrow-SE SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape devices per system. T able 19 shows conï¬guration constraints for each NSE SCSI device type. If the system has an internal CD-ROM drive, tape drive or hard disks con- nected to the SE SCSI bus, you must count them as SE SCSI devices.
178 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended peripherals on the same bus. Fast Wide Differential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints FWD SCSI devices do not work with NSE SCSI devices. T able 20 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each FWD SCSI device type. T able 19 Narr ow-SE SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints NSE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (two internal) 7 CD-ROM Drives (one internal) 1 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 2 9-track T ape Drives 2 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives 1 Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) 1 Maximum Number of NSE SCSI Devices 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three NSE SCSI drive address. Each ad- dress must be accounted for in the maximum number of SE SCSI devices al- lowed. T able 20 Fast, W ide Differential SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints FWD SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed FWD SCSI Disk Drive (two internal) 15 FWD SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7
179 SCSI Connections SCSI Restrictions CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI, and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra W ide-SE SCSI devices do not work with NSE SCSI or FWD SCSI devices. T able 20 shows the conï¬guration constraints for each Ultra SCSI device type. CAUTION: Do not mix Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI, Fast, W ide Differential SCSI and Ultra, W ide Single-Ended SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. T able 21 Ultra W ide Single-Ended SCSI Bus Conï¬guration Constraints Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Disk Drive (two internal) 2 Ultra, wide-SE SCSI Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 1
180 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Determining SCSI Bus Length This section helps you to determine the total length of the NSE SCSI bus and the FWD SCSI bus and the Ultra, wide-SE bus. NSE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total NSE SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external NSE SCSI devices, and NSE SCSI inter- connect cables) using T able 22: 1 Find all of your external NSE SCSI devices in the first column. In the third col- umn, write the NSE SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your devices. NOTICE In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the NSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â 3 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4 Add the subtotals together and write the total in the Total NSE SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE The total length of the NSE SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
181 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length Subtotals: __________ __________ T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length = __________ (T otal NSE SCSI bus length not to exceed 6 meters [19.6 feet]) FWD SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the FWD SCSI bus on your system, using T able 23. 1 List all of your internal FWD SCSI disk drives in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal FWD SCSI bus that corre- spond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the FWD SCSI interconnect ca- bles you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line T able 22 Bus Length W orksheet for NSE SCSI Bus NSE SCSI Device Internal NSE SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) Device Internal Length meters (feet) External Cable Length meters (feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A A2655A 0.3 (1.0) C1520B 0.2 (0.7) C1521B 0.2 (0.7) C1700C 1.1 (3.6) C1701C 0.3 (1.0) C1704C 0.0 (0.0) C1705C 0.0 (0.0) C2213A 1.5 (4.9) C2217T 1.3 (4.3)
182 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total FWD SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the FWD SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal FWD SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total bus length for the UW -SE SCSI bus on your system, using T able 23. 1 List all of your internal UW -SE SCSI disk drives in the first column. 2 In the third column, write the lengths of the internal UW -SE SCSI bus that corre- spond to your devices. 3 In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the UW -SE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) T able 23 Bus Length W orksheet for FW SCSI Bus FWD SCSI Device Internal FWD SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A C3034T 1.0 (3.3) C3035T 1.0 (3.3) C3036T 1.0 (3.3)
183 SCSI Connections Determining SCSI Bus Length 4 Add all of the numbers in the third column and write the sum on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 5 Add the subtotals together and write the total on the Total UW -SE SCSI Bus Length line. NOTICE: The total length of the UW -SE SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal UW -SE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters, try conï¬guring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative. Subtotals: ______________ ________ T otalUW -SE SCSI Bus Length = ______________ (T otal UW -SE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) T able 24 Bus Length W orksheet for UW SCSI Bus UWSE SCSI Device Internal UWSE SCSI Bus Length meters(feet) Device Internal Length meters(feet) External Cable Length meters(feet) System Unit 1.5 (4.9) 1.5 (4.9) N/A Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3) Device _______ 1.0 (3.3)?
184 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs Assigning SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1 In a terminal window, enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan -f After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could ï¬nd. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description =========================================================== 8 bc Pseudo Bus Converter 8/0 unknown Processor 8/12 ext_bus GSC Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/12.6 target 8/12.6.0 disk HP C3325W 8/12.7 target 8/12.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/16/0 ext_bus Built-in Parallel Interface 8/16/1 audio Built-in Audio 8/16/4 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/16/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/16/5.6 target 8/16/5.6.0 disk Quantum VP32210 8/16/5.7 target 8/16/5.7.0 ctl Initiator 8/16/6 lan Built-in LAN 8/16/7 ps2 Built-in Keyboard/Mouse 8/16/10 pc Built-in Floppy Drive 8/16/10.2 floppy HP_PC_FDC_FLOPPY 8/20 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/20/1 hil Built-in HIL 8/20/2 tty Built-in RS-232C 8/20/5 ba EISA Bus Adapter 8/24 graphics Graphics 62 processor Processor 63 memory Memory 2 Determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by looking under the H/W Path heading.
185 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs NSE SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a NSE SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your NSE SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 25: 1 Write in the NSE SCSI device ID of any internal drives in Table 25 2 Write in the type of external drives (SE SCSI, FW SCSI or Ultra SCSI) currently connected to your system under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 3 Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 4. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the NSE SCSI bus. 4 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller
186 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs 5 Write in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives in Table 25. 6 Write in the type of external single-ended drives currently connected to your workstation under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 7 Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 8. T able 25 Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Internal Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) External Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal System Drives: System SCSI Drive(s) ____________________ ____________________ CD-ROM Drive (if present, uses ID No.2) ____________________ N/A 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No.1) ____________________ N/A External Device Drives N/A ____________________ 1st __________________________ N/A ____________________ 2nd __________________________ N/A ____________________ 3rd __________________________ N/A ____________________ 4th ___________________________ N/A ____________________ 5th ___________________________ N/A ____________________ 6th __________________________ N/A ____________________ 7th __________________________ N/A ____________________ NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 single-ended SCSI devices (internal and external) con- nected to the system.
187 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI IDs, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus 8 Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller . FWD SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 26. 1 Write in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, Wide SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID un- der the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide differential SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID.
188 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able 26. 1 Write in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâs SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID.â 2 Add your new drive to the table. 3 Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. You may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new ultra, wide single-ended SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâs installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. T able 26 Fast, W ide SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Fast, Wide SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device _____________________________ _____________________________ 2nd Internal Device ____________________________ _____________________________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a fast, wide bus.
189 SCSI Connections Assigning SCSI Device IDs CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able 27 Ultra W ide SE SCSI Device Drives and Device ID Ultra Wide SE SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device _____________________________ _____________________________ 2nd Internal Device ____________________________ _____________________________ NOTICE: You can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to an Ultra, Wide SE SCSI bus.
190 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports Connecting to the SCSI Ports This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (single- ended and fast, wide). SCSI Port Connection The system contains three (3) external SCSI connectors: ⢠Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI Connector ⢠Fast, Wide Differential SCSI Connector ⢠Ultra, Wide Single-Ended SCSI Connector Figure 69 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Figure 69 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without Terminators SE SCSI Connector FW SCSI or UW SCSI Connector
191 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports NOTICE: If no external devices are connected to the SCSI connectors on the back panel, a SCSI terminator must be installed. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order a C2905A, 68-pin terminator for the FWD SCSI bus, a C2904A, 50- pin high density terminator for the NSE SCSI bus or a C2972A, 68- pin high density terminator for the Ultra, W ide, Single-Ended SCSI bus.
192 SCSI Connections Connecting to the SCSI Ports
193 D The Boot Console Interface
194 The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console interface and how to use them. It presents the information in the following sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Configure and display LAN setting ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
195 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menu-driven boot console interface that allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA, GSC, and PCI slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available. The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he, or ? and the menu or command you want help on.
196 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Main Menu ----------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>]Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/commands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system ------ Main Menu: Enter command >
197 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Configuration Menu -------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display boot-related information BootTimer [0 - 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig Display or set LAN configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current monitor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
198 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Information Menu ---------------------------------------------- Command Description ----------- ----------- ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display boot-related information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display built-in system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Information Menu: Enter command >
199 The Boot Console Interface Boot Console Interface Features ------ Service Menu -------------------------------------------------- Command Description ------- ----------- ChassisCodes [<proc>] Display chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>] Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ------ Service Menu: Enter command >
200 The Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system administrator . 1 Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2 Use the shutdown -h command as root user to shut down your system. When shutdown is complete, press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICES: There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or otherwise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3 When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the boot console Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the following mes- sages: Processor is booting from first available device.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. NOTICE: If you are using a power-saving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4 Press a key. You will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
201 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Booting Your Workstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HP-UX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operating sys- tem that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDS-format tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, speciï¬ed in Mnemonic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDS- format tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0 The operating system on the speciï¬ed device is used to start your workstation. ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ ear- lier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with ISL (Y,N,Q)>
202 The Boot Console Interface Booting Y our Workstation Answering yes ( y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the speciï¬ed device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter n. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt: ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your ï¬le systems have bootable oper- ating systems, you can ï¬nd them with the sear ch IPL command.
203 The Boot Console Interface Searching for Bootable Media Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccess- ing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠To continue the display, press Ctrl Q. ⢠To halt the search, press any other key These ï¬ow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl device_type Where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the optional fast, wide differential SCSI bus, or the built-in ultra, wide- SE SCSI bus (Model B180L only). sescsi is the built-in single-ended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the built-in LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
204 The Boot Console Interface Resetting Y our Workstation Resetting Your Workstation T o reset your workstation, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Con- sole Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > reset T o reset your workstation to its predeï¬ned values, follow the directions in "Accessing the Boot Console Interface" earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Conï¬guration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Conï¬guration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
205 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able 28. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speciï¬ed device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path T able 28 System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usually a DDS-format tape device) console or con Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstationâ s primary ASCII input device
206 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able 29. T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 28. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able 28 and path is the speciï¬cation of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as described in T able 29). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: T able 29 Mnemonic Style Notation I/O T ype Speciï¬cation Format Built-in FWSCSI fwsci. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in UWSCSI fwsci. scsi_address. logical_unit_number Built-in SCSI sescsi. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Optional gsc n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Optional pci n. scsi_addr ess .logical_unit_number Built-in LAN lan. server_addr ess .init_timeout.io_timeout
207 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting Paths Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0
208 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a speciï¬c resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different type of monitor , you must reconï¬gure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬g- uration. This command is available in Conï¬guration Menu of the boot con- sole interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics conï¬guration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the conï¬guration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; monitor The correct usage for setting the graphics conï¬guration is: monitor graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are: graphics(0) - The built-in 8-plane graphics adapter . graphics(1 ) and graphics(2) - Graphics adapters installed in option slots 1 and 2. and type is the numerical monitor type
209 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype When a dual display graphics adapter (an adapter which has two video out- put connectors) is installed, the video connector on the left (when looking at the system from the rear) is graphics( NA) and the video connector on the right is graphics( NB). Where N is the slot number in which the graphics adapter is installed. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 1 would be graphics(1A) and graphics(1B). NOTICE: There are graphics conï¬guration restrictions of which you must be aware when adding graphics adapters or reconï¬guring your graphics devices. For details on graphics conï¬guration restrictions, see the subsection â Graphics Configuration Restrictionsâ in Appendix B. Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor conï¬guration for your system from the Con- ï¬guration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Conï¬guration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and there monitor types conï¬gured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the built-in graphic adapter graphics(0) is conï¬gured. The monitor type for graphics(0) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 72 Hz.
210 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the follow- ing: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed; MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 72Hz Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 --------user defined------- Configuration Menu: Enter command >
21 1 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the follow- ing; Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class ----------- ---- ---- -------- ---------- ---- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your system. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n - nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card.
212 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Setting the Monitor Type at Power On If you replace your workstationâs monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâs graphics parameters by using the monitor com- mand before doing so, you need to perform the following: If your keyboard connects to the PS/2 connector on your system, wait 2 sec- onds after the Num Lock light ï¬ashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light ï¬ashes. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legibly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter . MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ----------- ---- ---- ---- ---------- ---- ----- GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to conï¬rm your selection. Press Y to save this mon- itor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed: To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 seconds)... T o restart the monitor selection process, press T AB .
213 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Changing the Console to External Terminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the fol- lowing procedure to display to console to an external terminal: 1 Turn system power off. 2 Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3 Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the top serial connector) on the system rear panel. 4 Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
214 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows a memory conï¬guration table with properly-installed and conï¬gured memory (Sample Output 1). T o display the current memory conï¬guration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and conï¬guration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The ï¬rst listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and conï¬gured memory modules. The second listing shows the information for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed of conï¬gured.
215 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Current Memory Conï¬guration Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory mod- ules are properly installed and conï¬gured MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ---- --------- ------ 0a/b 128MB Configured 1a/b 64MB Configured --------- TOTAL 192MB Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Memory HVERSION SVERSION -------- ---------- 0x0710 0x0900
216 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the Status of the System I/O Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all built-in I/O devices and optional I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the Information Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the built-in and optional I/O devices is displayed, similar to the example below . I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ------------ ------- ------------------------- ---------- ---- ---- ---- ---- 8 8 Bus Converter built-in 5040 0000 0x00 0x00 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge built-in 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O built-in 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter built-in 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel built-in 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio built-in 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 built-in 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI built-in 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN built-in 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse built-in 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy built-in 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 HIL 8/20/1 HIL built-in 0170 7300 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port built-in 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter built-in 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 built-in 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter built-in 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ---- ---- ------- 20/5/1 Unknown EISA card or slot empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class -------- -------------------------------- --- ------------------ built-in 8/0/19/0 0 SCSI built-in 8/0/20/0 0 Ethernet
217 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto sear ch are variables stored in your workstationâ s non- volatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these ï¬ags to new value, the change takes ef fect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search ï¬ags, type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot console user interface. The state of the auto sear ch ï¬ag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto sear ch is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot device is not available. If auto search is off , your workstation will default to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto search ï¬ags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off.
218 The Boot Console Interface Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Built-in fast, wide SCSI devices SCSI card in slot 1 SCSI card in slot 2 Built-in single-ended SCSI devices Built-in LAN bootp servers NOTICE: Fast wide SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
219 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Security Mode Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECur e ï¬ag is a variable stored in non-volatile memory . (Non-volatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this ï¬ag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECur e ï¬ag is set to on , autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regard- less of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure ï¬ag, enter the following com- mand: secure T o set the SECure ï¬ag on or of f, enter one of the following: secure on secure off
220 The Boot Console Interface Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing during its power-on self tests. This enables your workstation to complete its boot process quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by performing a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off), more extensive memory testing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, causing the boot pro- cess to take longer . If you are experiencing difï¬culty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
221 The Boot Console Interface Displaying the LAN Station Address Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your worksta- tion to other users. For example, if your workstation is to become a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identi- ï¬es the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadeci- mal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009-789abc The address is for the systemâ s built-in LAN.
222 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) Configure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) The LanConï¬g command conï¬gures and displays the current LAN settings. The hardware system supports 10Base-T , 100Base-T and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec or 10 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex), operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u, (this is the default and recommended setting) type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the following at the prompt:
223 The Boot Console Interface Conï¬gure and Display LAN Settings (B132L /B180L Only) Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTE: The LAN setting defaults to LAN-TP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LAN-AUI setting. Also note that the new lan configuration settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command
224 The Boot Console Interface Displaying System Information Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revision and speed, cache size, memory size, ï¬ag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Information Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
225 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM information for the speciï¬ed fault type. T o display PIM information for a speciï¬c fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim processor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim - gives all fault types pim 0 - HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type - fault type information on processor
226 The Boot Console Interface Displaying PIM Information
227 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root direc- tory (â/â) and ending with the filename itself. See also file, filename, path- name . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access per- missions . active window The window that is re- ceiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active win- dow, anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The ac- tive window is said to have the âkey- board focus.â ANSI The American National Stan- dards Institute, a non-profit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by na- tional industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on. attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v. To make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strict- ly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, ca- pable of representing 2-color images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A ser- vice provided by a short program, stored in the read-only memory of your work- station, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory. Partner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless worksta- tions. See also boot ROM. boot console interface The interactive firmware that enables you to interact with the hardware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operat- ing system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, dis- play information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A read-only memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and producing a standard display. bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental character-code unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CDE The Hewlett-Packard Common Desktop Environment. CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory. See also CD-ROM disc, CD- ROM drive . CD-ROM disc CD-ROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, ex-
228 Glossary cept that they store data. CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter, and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CD-ROM drive A random-access, read-only, mass-storage device that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for read- ing data optically and an embedded con- troller with a SCSI interface. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory . click To press and release a mouse but- ton. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse but- tons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations con- nected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, per- forms as a file-system server for the clus- ter clients. See also cluster client, cluster node , cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HP-UX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server. See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server, performs as a server to the cluster. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster server . cluster server A workstation that pro- vides file access, login access, file trans- fer, printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , cluster client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command . command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HP-UX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell . command option Information you pro- vide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke
Glossary 229 combination used as a shorthand way of specifying commands. To enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control key while pressing another key. cpu See Central Processing Unit . CRX color graphics Expanded graph- ics capability offering 24-plane color, 24-plane Z-buffered color, or 48-plane Z-buffered color capability. current directory See current work- ing directory . current session The work and process- es that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session. current working directory The direc- tory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory. cursor The small blinking box dis- played in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE ter- minal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisy-chaining A method of connect- ing devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cas- settes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automat- ic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window. Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. To display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager but- ton on the Workspace, then click on Col- or. directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HP-UX organizational structure. Basically, it is a file that stores names and links to files and other direc- tories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk , CD-ROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation
230 Glossary can use the disk of its partner worksta- tion or other workstations. If necessary, it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other work- stations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node , workstation . double click To press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag To press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CD-ROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop To release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . EISA (Extended Industry Standard Architecture) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their AT series computers. environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment variables . environment variables The set of de- fined shell variables (some of which are PATH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory, and default search paths. See also environ- ment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corpora- tion, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based. fast, differential SCSI An 8-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and driv- ers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 10 MB per second. See also fast-wide SCSI , single- ended standard SCSI , Small Comput- er System Interface . fast-wide SCSI A 16-bit wide bus with high-power receivers and drivers, which allows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also fast, differential SCSI , single- ended standard SCSI , Small Comput- er System Interface . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory, filename. file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directo- ry. Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that deter- mines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferenc- es. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file ,
Glossary 231 pathname . file server A workstation whose prima- ry task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data. file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. firmware The control software that is embedded in ROM and is always resi- dent despite the status of the operating system. It handles the booting of the sys- tem, initialization of I/O, and starts the loading of the operating system. floppy diskette A thin, record-shaped plate that stores data on its magnetic sur- faces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. HCRX color graphics Accelerated 8- plane or 24-plane graphics. See also CRX color graphics . Help Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable rep- resenting the home directory. This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. Typically, this is /users/ login , or /home/login , where login is your username. See also home directo- ry . home directory A shorthand way of re- ferring to a frequently used directory, al- most always the login directory. host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol ad- dress . HP-UX cluster See cluster node , clus- ter server . HP Visual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X Window system), en- abling you to control your workstation by directly manipulating graphical ob- jects instead of by typing commands at a command-line prompt. HP VUE See HP Visual User Envi- ronment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âiconizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. What- ever processes are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is
232 Glossary iconized. iconify See iconize . iconize To turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon. Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give infor- mation to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also out- put device . input window The window that dis- plays a programâs prompt and any com- mands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol address (IP ad- dress) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a network. Also referred to as the IP ad- dress, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as -a. IP address See internet protocol ad- dress . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code re- sponsible for managing the computerâs resources. The kernel controls the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network . LAN station address See local area network station address . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you spec- ify a link as a pathname or part of a path- name, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v. To join together two or more objects. local area network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to com- municate with each other. The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Services software. local area network system address The label that uniquely identifies the lo- cal area network (LAN) connection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in To initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This cre- ates your first user process. See also username . login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory. See also home di- rectory . Login Manager The program that con- trols the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the userâs username and pass-
Glossary 233 word. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system. menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pull-down or pop-up menus for that ap- plication. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize . mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory, or link. A name can in- clude various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character. See also pathname . network Two or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster, workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver, the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and net- work media access. node A network computer (worksta- tion). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with another node. See also disked workstation , diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster. See also cluster , node . nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after work- station power is turned off. object Any file, directory, or link in the network. See also directory , file , link , pathname . operating system The program that su- pervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HP-UX system, including the ker- nel and all HP-UX commands. See also kernel . option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output de- vices. See also input device. output window The window that dis- plays a process response to your com- mand. parent directory A directory that con- tains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory. See also sub- directory . partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also diskless workstation .
234 Glossary password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occa- sionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user ac- count . path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destination ob- ject. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every di- rectory name between the starting point and the destination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also re- ferred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID . pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer,â the pointer shows the mouse lo- cation on the screen. The pointerâs shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE Workspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow. process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a pro- gram currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the operating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HP-UX commands and routines consist of pro- grams. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a real-life push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory. ROM Read-only memory. root See superuser . scroll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a win- dow that allows the user to view infor- mation that does not fit within the window. SCSI See Small Computer System In- terface . server A program that controls all ac- cess to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A command-line interpreter pro-
Glossary 235 gram used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HP-UX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key, and C shells. Some- times referred to as a command interpret- er. See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you give the system to execute a utility pro- gram or shell script. See also shell script , utility program . shell script A file that contains com- mands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multi-user state to system administration state. SIMM See Single In-line Memory Module . single-ended standard SCSI An 8-bit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, differ- ential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , Small Computer System Interface . Single In-line Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar. The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfac- ing a computer to multiple, disparate high-speed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CD-ROM, singly or in combi- nation. See also fast, differential SCSI , fast-wide SCSI , single-ended standard SCSI . standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster. See also cluster. Style Manager The HP VUE applica- tion that provides the ability to custom- ize various aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior, and access to other worksta- tions. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below, another directory. The directory above the subdi- rectory is called the parent directory. The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory. See also parent directo- ry . superuser A user with permission to enter the top-level directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. To âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now as- suming the role of system administrator. You can do this either by logging into the system as root, or by typing su at a com- mand-line prompt. You must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person re- sponsible for system and network instal- lation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel pro- cess by a user program.
236 Glossary system name See internet protocol address . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emu- lates a complete display terminal. Termi- nal windows are typically used to fool non-client programs into believing they are running in their favorite terminal. When not running programs or execut- ing operating system commands, termi- nal windows display the command-line prompt. See also HP Visual User Envi- ronment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the win- dow object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person authorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâs password. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Your system administrator assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login procedure when the sys- tem displays the login prompt. See also user account . username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The user- name is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software re- quiring secure entry. utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequently required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a di- rectory. See also command, shell com- mand . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of win- dows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also Workspace Manager . Window Manager The HP VUE pro- gram that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current work- ing directory . Workspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic ob- jects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP Visual User Environment , terminal window . Workspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and op-
Glossary 237 eration of windows on the HP VUE Workspace. The Workspace Manager is a special Window Manager. See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphics-ori- ented computer having high speed and high memory capacity. A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a monitor, and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation.
238 Glossary
239 Symbols $HOME,, 231 A absolute pathname,, 227 access permissions,, 227 acoustics regulations, 99 active window,, 227 ANSI,, 227 archiving data listing files,, 60 restoring files,, 60 saving to a cassette,, 59 archiving data,, 59 argument,, 227 attachment unit interface (AUI),, 227 audio connectors, 15 controls, 13 conversion formula, 17 electrical specifications, 16 features, 15 headset jack, 13 inputs, 15 mic jack, 13 mute button, 13 outputs, 16 volume control, 13 auto boot,, 217 auto boot, changing state,, 217 auto search,, 217 auto search, changing state,, 217 auto-negotiation failure, 79 B back up,, 227 battery replacing the, 155 bitmap,, 227 boot console accessing,, 200 features,, 195 menus,, 195 boot console interface,, 227 boot failure dealing with, 87 boot ROM,, 227 boot,, 227 bootable media searching for,, 203 bootstrap service,, 227 bus length determining, 180, 181, 182 fast-wide differential SCSI, 181, 182 single-ended SCSI-2, 180 byte,, 227 C cables SCSI devices and, 175 cautions and warnings, 103 CD-ROM disc busy light during self test,, 43 mounting and unmounting,, 40 mounting using SAM,, 40 unmounting using SAM,, 42 CD-ROM disc,, 227 CD-ROM discs caring for,, 32 CD-ROM drive controls and features,, 29 description,, 29 installing, 121 problems using, 81 troubleshooting,, 45 verifying operation,, 39 CD-ROM drive,, 228 CD-ROM media,, 32 CD-ROM,, 227 Central Processing Unit (CPU),, 228 child directory,, 228 click,, 228 cluster client,, 228 cluster node,, 228 cluster server,, 228 cluster,, 228 command argument,, 228 command interpreter,, 228 command option,, 228 command,, 228 commands all,, 224 auto,, 217 boot,, 201 cd,, 70 eisa,, 216 fastboot,, 220, 222, 223 lanaddress,, 221 mediainit,, 69 memory,, 214 path,, 205 pim,, 225 reset,, 204 search,, 203 tar,, 59 configuration changing your workstation, 109 SCSI device constraints, 177 configuration,, 228 connections SCSI devices, 172 SCSI ports, 190 connectors audio, 15 HP parallel I/O, 17 keyboard, 17 mouse, 17 network, 17 power cord, 19 PS/2, 20 rear panel, 14 SCSI devices, 18, 177 serial I/O, 18 control key sequence,, 228 controls audio, 13 TOC button, 19 cpu,, 229 CRX color graphics,, 229 current directory,, 229 current working directory,, 229 cursor,, 229 D daisy-chaining,, 229 data cassettes cleaning heads,, 54 media life,, 53 media restrictions,, 54 ordering information,, 62 setting write-protect tab,, 55 DDS tape drive controls and indicators,, 49 Index
240 Index installing, 121 LED code warning conditions high humidity,, 52 media wear,, 52 selft-test,, 52 LED codes,, 51 loading and unloading data cassette,, 56 problems using, 82 troubleshooting,, 62 using device files,, 58, 68 verifying operation,, 57 DDS tape drive,, 229 DDS tape drives operating,, 56 default,, 229 devices boot failures and, 87 installing storage, 114 internal storage, 9 pointing, 18 removable storage, 13 dialog box,, 229 directory,, 229 disk,, 229 disked workstation,, 229 diskette,, 229 diskettes ordering information,, 74 diskless booting,, 229 diskless workstation,, 229 documentation conventions, 4 double click,, 230 drag,, 230 drive,, 230 drop,, 230 E EISA, 10 EISA boards, 10 installing, 148 EISA slots displaying status,, 216 EISA,, 230 electrostatic discharge, 100 emissions regulations, 96 regulations compliance, 98 environment variables,, 230 environment,, 230 ETHERNET,, 230 F fast, differential SCSI,, 230 fastboot disabling,, 220 displaying status,, 220, 222 enabling,, 220 fastboot,, 220 fast-wide SCSI,, 230 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 96 file access permissions,, 230 File Manager,, 230 file server,, 231 file system,, 231 file,, 230 filename,, 230 floor stand removing, 110 floppy disk drive disconnecting cables, 126 installing, 123 problems using, 83 removing, 127 floppy diskette formatting,, 69 inserting and removing,, 66 listing files,, 71 restoring files from,, 70 saving files to,, 70 setting write-protect,, 65 transferring data,, 70 floppy diskette,, 231 floppy drive operating,, 67 verifying configuration,, 67 floppy drive,, 231 floppy driver configuring,, 73 ftp, 25 G GSC option boards, 10 installing, 148 H hard disk drive configuring, 135 installing in front position, 126 installing in rear position, 131 problems using, 80 hard disk drive,, 231 hard disk,, 231 HCRX color graphics,, 231 Help Manager,, 231 home directory,, 231 host name,, 231 host,, 231 HP Visual User Environment,, 231 HP VUE,, 231 HP-UX cluster,, 231 I icon,, 231 iconify,, 232 iconize,, 232 IDs checking SCSI, 107 Initial System Loader,, 232 input audio, 15 input device,, 232 input window,, 232 internet protocol address,, 232 invisible filename,, 232 IP address,, 232 ISL,, 232 K kernel,, 232 L LAN auto-negotiation, 222 cabling, 79 setting, 222 settings, 79 LAN station address,, 221, 232 LAN station address,displaying,, 221 LAN,, 232 LANIC ID, 22 LEDs error codes, 84
Index 241 power, 12 problems, 77 system, 12 link,, 232 local area network system address,, 232 local area network,, 232 log in,, 232 login directory,, 232 Login Manager,, 232 login script,, 233 M mail, 24 main tray assembly removing, 111 replacing, 112 man commands ftp, 25 rcp, 25 rlogin, 24 telnet, 24 memory, 9 displaying configuration,, 214 installing additional, 137 installing modules, 141 nonvolatile,, 217 removing modules, 138 menu bar,, 233 minimize button,, 233 monitor displaying type,, 208, 209 setting type at power on, 212 setting type,, 210 monitors changing type of, 168 setting type at power on, 168 setting type from boot console interface, 168 types of, 20 mouse, 20 connector, 17 mouse pointer,, 233 N name,, 233 network, 10 auto-negotiation failure, 79 connector, 17 network controller,, 233 network,, 233 networking ftp, 25 mail, 24 NFS, 25 overview, 24 problems, 79 rcp, 25 rlogin, 24 telnet, 24 NFS, 25 node name,, 233 node,, 233 nonvolatile memory,, 217, 233 O object,, 233 operating system, 9 overview, 21 problems loading and booting, 78 operating system,, 233 option boards installing, 151 option,, 233 ordering information cleaning cassettes,, 62 data cassettes,, 62 diskettes,, 74 output device,, 233 output window,, 233 P parent directory,, 233 partner node,, 233 password,, 234 path displaying,, 205 setting,, 206 path,, 205, 234 pathname,, 234 permissions,, 234 PID,, 234 PIM information,displaying,, 225 pointer,, 234 power cord connector, 19 power switch, 12 precautions electrostatic discharge, 100 problems loading and booting, 78 networking, 79 operating system, 78 power up, 77 solving, 77 using CD-ROM drive, 81 using DDS tape drive, 82 using floppy disk drive, 83 using hard disk drive, 80 process ID,, 234 process,, 234 processor performance, 9 program,, 234 prompt,, 234 push button,, 234 R RAM,, 234 rcp, 25 regulations emissions, 96 emissions compliance, 99 regulatory and safety statements, 92 related manuals, 3 release documents, 2 revision history, 3 rlogin, 24 ROM,, 234 root,, 234 S safety laser, 102 standards, 101 safety and regulatory statements, 92 SAM using to configure a hard disk drive, 135 scroll bar,, 234 SCSI devices assigning IDs, 184 bus differences, 173 cables, 175 checking IDs, 107 configuration constraints, 177 connecting to ports, 190 connections, 172
242 Index connectors, 18 connectors and terminators, 177 determining bus length, 180 restrictions, 175 SCSI,, 234 security loop, 15 serial I/O connectors, 18 server,, 234 session,, 234 shell command,, 235 shell script,, 235 shell,, 234 shutdown,, 235 SIMM,, 235 Single In-line Memory Module,, 235 single-ended standard SCSI,, 235 slider,, 235 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI),, 235 standalone,, 235 storage devices configuring, 115 determining position of, 115 installing, 114 removable, 13 storage tray removing, 117 replacing, 133 storage tray cover removing, 120 replacing, 132 Style Manager,, 235 subdirectory,, 235 superuser,, 235 system administrator,, 235 system call,, 235 system information,displaying,, 224 system name,, 236 system verification tests running, 88 T tar command, additional information,, 61 telnet, 24 terminal window,, 236 tests running system verification, 88 title bar,, 236 TOC button, 19 trackball, 20 transceiver,, 236 U user account,, 236 user ID,, 236 user interface, 9, 10 username,, 236 utility program,, 236 utility,, 236 W warnings and cautions, 103 Window Manager,, 236 window,, 236 working directory,, 236 Workspace Manager,, 236 Workspace,, 236 workstation booting,, 201 changing the hardware configuration of, 106 features, 9 preparing to change configuration, 109 resetting to predefined parameters, 204 resetting,, 204 security loop, 15 Workstation,, 237